JP2015096158A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine executing a performance for enabling a player to enjoy both of a normal performance and a special performance.SOLUTION: Performance control means executes a normal performance executed as a result of a lottery and a special performance, and executes error notification. The performance control means executes the normal performance in a first mode when the special performance is not being executed and executes a normal performance in a second mode differing from a first mode when executing the normal performance during execution of the special performance. Error notification is executed even during execution of the special performance.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that produces effects according to the game situation.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a big hit lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize such as a start opening. When the jackpot is won, the gaming machine is put into a jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot is opened and many winning balls can be obtained. Therefore, in the hall in which the gaming machine is installed, the player plays a game so that the player wins a lottery by winning by hitting a game ball in order to put the gaming machine into a jackpot gaming state. In the gaming machine, in accordance with the lottery game using the game balls by the player, various effects such as display on the display unit, lighting of various lamps, sound by a speaker, and the like (hereinafter referred to as “game effects”). ) Is performed.

In addition, there is known a gaming machine that performs a special effect (hereinafter referred to as “special effect”) that progresses separately from the game effect by using a display unit, a speaker, or the like of the game machine.
For example, in Patent Document 1, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine arranged side by side on an island in a hall, a synchronous effect is executed all at a fixed time, and a countdown image is displayed before the execution of the synchronous effect. It is described that it comprises.

JP 2007-252534 A

  By the way, depending on the progress timing of the game based on the result of the lottery, the game effect and the special effect may be performed simultaneously. In such a case, if only one of the effects is displayed on the display unit of the gaming machine, the interest for the player who is looking forward to both effects will be halved. Also, if both effects are simply displayed in parallel on the display unit, it is difficult to utilize each effect.

  An object of the present invention is to provide an effect that allows a player to enjoy both a game effect and a special effect.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a time measuring means for measuring time, a time determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has been reached based on a time measurement result of the time measuring means, and a predetermined error. Error determination means for determining whether or not it has occurred, a normal effect that is executed based on the result of the lottery, and a special effect that is executed when it is determined by the time determination means that a predetermined time has been reached And an effect control means for notifying that it is determined that an error has occurred by the error determination means, and the effect control means is not executing the special effect. When the normal effect is executed, the normal effect is executed according to the first aspect, and when the normal effect is executed when the special effect is being executed, it is different from the first aspect. The second aspect performs normal effect, the error notification is performed even when running the special effect.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to enjoy both the normal effect and the special effect.

Schematic front view of pachinko machine 1 Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. Schematic perspective view showing the internal structure of the specific region 9 Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and gaming state Schematic diagram of a gaming system in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed Screen diagram for explaining the flow of effects performed using main liquid crystal display device 5 The screen figure which shows a mode that the special effect image currently displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is reduced-displayed on specific conditions Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the music performance direction performed with the pachinko machine 1 The screen figure which shows an example of the performance announcement effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6 Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of music performance production performed in the pachinko machine 1 after all new songs are performed The block diagram which shows the structural example of the control apparatus with which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The block diagram which shows the structural example of the image sound control board 140 Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing process 1 which is a drawing process in normal production | presentation mode Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing process 2 which is a drawing process in special production mode Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing process 3 and the drawing process 4 which are the drawing processes in special effect mode The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the game control board 100 Detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21. Detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S23. Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of jackpot determination processing in step S307 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S319 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of normal symbol processing in step S4 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of electric tulip process in step S5 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of specific area release control processing in step S6 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of specific area release control processing in step S6 of FIG. FIG. 16 is a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S7. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the production during the special game Detailed flowchart of the long hit game control processing in step S72 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the short hit game control process in step S76 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the gaming state setting process in step S745 in FIG. 30 and step S780 in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the production control board 130 FIG. 33 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10. FIG. 33 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10. FIG. 33 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10. Block diagram showing a configuration example of the control ROM 144 The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the image sound control board 140 Detailed flowchart of the measurement processing in step S2100 of FIG. Explanatory diagram for explaining the performance management table Detailed flowchart of the state control process in step S2200 of FIG. Explanatory drawing for explaining the musical performance performance permission state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a music performance performance order management table Detailed flowchart of the notification effect control process in step S2300 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the performance announcement effect control process in step S2400 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the performance announcement effect control process in step S2400 of FIG. Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the start time of the performance announcement production and the time required for the long open round game Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the start time of the performance announcement production and the time required for the short hit game Detailed flowchart of the music performance production start process in step S2500 of FIG. Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the production when it becomes the start time of the performance announcement production when the variation production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is not performed Explanatory drawing for explaining the flow of production when it is the start time of the performance announcement production, which is a special production executed in the special production mode during the production of the fluctuation accompanying the display of special symbols. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the timing chart of symbol variation, jackpot production, and special production Explanatory diagram for explaining the production when decorative symbols are aligned in the special production mode Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display image at the time of shifting to the jackpot game state in the normal performance mode Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display image at the time of shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the special effect mode Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Schematic diagram of the default table Schematic of new song A main table Schematic of new song B main table Schematic diagram of new song C main table Schematic diagram of new song D main table Schematic diagram of new song E main table Schematic diagram of new song L main table Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of the image data used for drawing of a background image Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of the appearance rate of various background images Detailed flowchart of the music performance effect end processing in step S2700 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of image output control processing in step S2800 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the audio output control processing in step S2900 of FIG. Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the start time of the performance announcement production and the variation time of the special symbol Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of a music performance directing permission flag Schematic diagram of all-mode table Explanatory drawing which shows the screen structure in the jackpot game in the special effect mode of other Embodiment 1. Explanatory drawing which shows the screen structure of normal production mode and special production mode of other Embodiment 2.

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of schematic configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 / type 2 mixed type. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a game board 2 provided with an accessory related to winning or determination, and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval. The glass board and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is connected to a card lending unit (not shown) that is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and inserts a card owned by the player (a so-called prepaid card or a membership card) into the card lending unit. By operating a lending button (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a lending request signal corresponding to the operation is transmitted from the card lending unit to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the lending request signal is received. 1, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the tray 28 by a payout control board, which will be described later, and the player starts a game using the paid out game balls.
The pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a card return promotion display for urging the player to return the card when the jackpot game ends. The purpose of this card return promotion display is to prevent card theft and forgetting to return, and when the jackpot game ends, the card return promotion display is performed when the game continues after the jackpot game ends, This is because the player has acquired a large amount of game balls through the jackpot game, so that it is not necessary to play a game using a card.

  When the player grasps the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 in the clockwise direction, the game balls stored in the tray 28 are guided to the launching device (not shown), and the game is performed with the hitting force according to the rotation angle of the handle 20. Fired into region 10. This game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the launched game balls are guided to the upper position in the game area 10 and contacted with the game nails, windmills, etc. It falls along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. Note that the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22.

  In addition, when the player operates the take-out button 23 that is disposed close to the tray 28, a part of the lower surface of the tray 28 is opened, and the game balls accumulated on the tray 28 are disposed below the tray 28 (not shown). Fall into the box. The dish 28 may be constituted by two dishes, an upper dish for storing game balls and prize balls supplied to the launching device, and a lower dish for collecting prize balls.

  When the player performs a so-called “left strike” in which the handle 20 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called “right strike” in which the handle 20 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right region in the game region 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

  A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passing path of the left-handed game ball as a winning and determining role. In addition, in the passing path of the right-handed game ball, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, the two normal winning ports 14, the gate 16, the electric tulip 17, and the specified character are used as the winning and determination-related items. A winning opening 19 and a blade member 90 are provided.

  The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big winning port 13, and the normal winning port 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. And win. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning location are paid out to the tray 28. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

  The first start opening 11 as the first winning area is a start opening that is always open, and the second start opening 12 as the second winning area is operated by the electric tulip 17 as an ordinary electric accessory. It is a starting port that is opened only when In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins a prize through the first start port 11, or when a game ball wins a prize through the second start port 12, a special game advantageous to the player is executed? It is determined whether or not, and the determination result is displayed on the display 4 described later.

  In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the first start port 11 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and the game ball wins on the second start port 12 is a condition. The determination to be executed is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.

  The special winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big prize opening 13 is provided at the opening of the big prize opening 13. The special winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the display 4, that is, when one kind of jackpot has occurred, the plate is operated to win a big prize opening. A special game of opening 13 is executed. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by making a right strike during the special game (during the big hit game) compared to when the special game is not being performed. When a predetermined small winning symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small bonus is stopped and displayed on the display 4, a small member that activates the blade member 90 described later to open the specific winning opening 19 is displayed. A winning game is executed. During the small hit game, the V winning opening 92 (see FIG. 3) is temporarily opened, and a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during this time, thereby generating two types of big wins. The big winning opening 13 is also opened when two types of jackpots are generated.

  The electric tulip 17 is disposed close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 is configured to change its posture between a closed posture (see FIG. 1) in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 12 and an open posture (not shown) in which the second starting port 12 is opened. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the second start port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, it is determined whether or not the second start port 12 is to be opened, although no prize ball is paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the operation of returning to the closed posture after the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 has maintained the open posture for the specified time is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second starting port 12 is in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to win when the electric tulip 17 is not operated, whereas the game ball is easily won by operating the electric tulip 17. Become. In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the gate 16 is referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”.

  The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first start opening 11 and is a winning opening through which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Unlike the first starting port 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins the normal winning port 14, no determination is made.

  On the back side of the game board 2, there are a radio wave detection sensor (not shown) for detecting an electromagnetic wave having a predetermined electric field strength or higher in a predetermined band and a magnetic sensor (not shown) for detecting a magnetic force having a predetermined strength or higher. Is provided. The positions of these sensors are, for example, positions near various winning openings such as the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 13, the specific winning opening 19, and the center decoration provided on the game board surface. It is the back side of various kinds of objects such as movable objects.

  On the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 5 to be described later, a specific area 9 that is temporarily opened according to the result of the special symbol determination is provided. The specific area 9 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination. As shown in FIG. 2, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, and the first special symbol are displayed. A symbol holding display 43, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol holding display 46, and a game state display 47 are configured.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the first special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. The first special symbol display 41 has a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit (1 type big hit), or a lost symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss. Is stopped.

  When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the second special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. The second special symbol display 42 has a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot (1 type jackpot), and a small hit indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot A losing symbol indicating that the symbol or the result of the second special symbol determination is losing is stopped and displayed.

  By the way, when a game ball is newly won at the first starting port 11 during the symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination or during the special game, the first special symbol determination and the symbol variation display are immediately triggered by this winning. Can not be executed. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment seems to hold the right of the first special symbol determination when the first special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if a game ball wins the first starting port 11. It is configured. The first special symbol hold indicator 43 displays the number of hold of the first special symbol determination held in this way.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if a game ball wins at the second starting port 12, the second special symbol determination and the symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately, that is, during the symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination or If a new game ball is won at the second starting port 12 during the special game, the second special symbol determination is not executed, and the right of the second special symbol determination is not held. For this reason, the display device 4 is not provided with a display device that displays the number of reserved second symbol determinations.

  When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by suspending and displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol. Note that the normal symbol determination and the symbol variation display related to the normal symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if the game ball passes through the gate 16, such as during the symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 45, for example. Judgment rights are withheld. The normal symbol hold display 46 displays the number of hold for normal symbol determination held in this way. The game state display 47 displays the game state at the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is called “special symbol”, and the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 45 is “normal symbol”. Shall be called.

[Configuration Example of Specific Area 9]
FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the specific region 9. The vertical direction 34 and the width direction 35 in FIG. 3 correspond to the vertical direction 34 and the width direction 35 in FIG. The specific area 9 is an area where a game ball is opened so as to be able to enter when a small hit occurs, and a blade member 90 that opens and closes the specific prize opening 19 is provided in the specific prize opening 19 that is the entrance. Yes.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is “big hit” is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. And, the first special game is executed with one kind of big hit.

  In the present embodiment, as the first special game, two types of special games, a long winning game and a short winning game, are provided.

  The long winning game is a state in which the grand prize opening 13 is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, nine game balls are awarded to the big prize opening 13 or 29 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening 13 is opened). A long open round game in which the special winning opening 13 is closed after being maintained is executed a prescribed number of times. In the present embodiment, two types of long games for long-open round games, that is, 8R long games that are executed 4 times, and 7R long games that are executed 7 times long-open round games are played as long-games per 1 type big hit. A winning game is provided. In the long open round game, if the large winning opening 13 is long open so that a plurality of game balls can enter, the large winning opening 13 is opened and closed with an opening pattern different from the opening pattern exemplified in the present embodiment. You may do.

  The short win game is a short-opening round game in which the big prize opening 13 is closed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening 13 is opened and then the big prize opening 13 is closed. Is a 15R short game that executes a specified number of times (for example, 15 times). The prescribed number of times is not limited to 15 as long as it is plural. Further, in the short open round game, if the game ball is opened shortly so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter, the open game opening 13 is opened and closed with an open pattern different from the open pattern exemplified in the present embodiment. It may be.

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit” is stopped and displayed as the determination symbol on the second special symbol display 42, the blade member 90 is operated to operate the specific region 9. A small hit game that releases is executed. In this small hit game, the operation of the blade member 90 that closes the specific area 9 after maintaining the state in which the specific area 9 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 3.2 seconds) elapses after the specific area 9 is opened. It is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, once). In this way, when the small hit occurs, the game ball can enter the specific area 9.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the specific area 9 is provided with a guide member 91, a V winning opening 92, a lose winning opening 93, and a slide member 94. The guide member 91 guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 9 from the specific winning opening 19 to the V winning opening 92 or the lost winning opening 93. When a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 or the lose winning opening 93, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. The lose prize opening 93 is always open, whereas the V prize opening 92 is normally closed by the slide member 94 and is opened only for a predetermined period after the specific prize opening 19 is opened. Specifically, in this embodiment, for example, 0.5 seconds after the specific winning opening 19 is opened, the slide member 94 slides to open the V winning opening 92, and 0.2 V from the opening of the V winning opening 92. When the second elapses, the slide member 94 returns to the original position shown in FIG. 3, and the V winning opening 92 is closed.

  Then, two kinds of big wins are generated when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 (V winning) during the opening period of the V winning opening 92, and the second special game including the already played small winning game is executed. The That is, when two types of big hits occur, the long hit game is executed following the small hit game. Specifically, following the small hit game in which the specific area 9 is opened for 3.2 seconds, the long win game consisting of seven long open round games in which the big winning opening 13 is opened long, or the big winning opening 13 is set. A long hit game consisting of 14 long open round games that are long open is executed. That is, a total of 8R special games including one small hit game and seven long open round games, or a total of 15R special games including one small hit game and 14 long open round games are executed. Is done.

  As described above, in the special game based on the 1st type jackpot, the first special game composed of the round game in which only the winning prize opening 13 is opened, whereas in the special game based on the 2nd type jackpot, the specific area 9 is opened. A second special game composed of a small hit game and a round game that opens the big prize opening 13 is executed. Note that if the game ball does not win the V winning opening 92 during the opening period of the V winning opening 92, the big winning opening 13 will not be opened following the small hit game, so the second special game is small. It will end with 1R of only winning games.

  In this embodiment, the case where the V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by the slide member 94 will be described. However, the V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by a blade member that rotates about the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an axial direction. It may be. In addition, the operation pattern of the blade member 90 during one small hit game (time and number of times for opening the specific winning opening 19) and the like can be appropriately changed.

[Description of changes in gaming state]
Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 4, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game is controlled in the “normal game state” or the “time-saving game state”.

  The “normal game state” is a normal game state in which a so-called electric chew support function is not given. Specifically, in the “normal game state”, when the second start port 12 is opened, the rate determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low rate (for example, 1/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set. A relatively long time (for example, 25 seconds) is set, and when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the opening time of the second start port 12 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second × 1). Game state set to (times).

  The “time saving gaming state” is a gaming state to which an electric chew support function is provided. Specifically, in the “short-time gaming state”, when the second start port 12 is opened, the rate determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high rate (for example, 12/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set. A relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds) is set, and when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 12 is relatively long (for example, 0.3 seconds × 5). Game state set to (times). In other words, the “short-time gaming state” is a gaming state in which the second start port 12 is more easily controlled to the open state than in the normal gaming state.

  Due to the board configuration of the game board 2, a game ball launched into the left area of the game area 10 can win the first starting port 11, whereas a game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 There will never be a prize at the starting port 11. Further, the second start port 12 is unlikely to be in an open state in the “normal game state”. For this reason, there is no merit of making a right strike in the “normal game state”. In this way, the “normal game state” is a left-side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit a jackpot than hitting a game ball in the left area of the game area 10 than in the right area. 5 is left-handed according to the message displayed at 5 and the voice guidance output from the speaker 24.

  When the player makes a left strike in the “normal game state” and the game ball launched into the left area of the game area 10 wins the first start port 11, the first special symbol determination is performed and the first special symbol is determined. After the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 41, the determination symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol is determined to be one type of big win, the first special symbol display 41 is stopped and the big special symbol indicating that is stopped and the first special game that opens the special winning opening 13 is performed. Executed. The gaming state is set at the end of the first special game in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 at the start of the first special game. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 4, the “normal game state” is continued at a rate of 50% after the first special game is finished, while the remaining 50% is changed from “normal game state” to “ The gaming state changes to “short-time gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, after the first special game is completed, the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 4, after the seven long open round games are performed as illustrated in FIG. There is a short per 7R when the normal gaming state is entered, and 50% of the one type large per 7R per short at this time. In addition, 15 times per 8R with a short time that will be in a short-time game state after four long open round games have been performed as per short time when the game will be controlled in the short-time game state after the end of the first special game. There are two types of short-acting short-term games that become short-time game states after the short-opening round game is completed, and 50% of the one-type game is one of these two types of short-timed games.

  When the gaming state shifts to the “time-saving gaming state”, the second start port 12 is more likely to be in the open state than in the “normal gaming state”. In addition, since most of the results of the second special symbol determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the second starting port 12 is a small hit, two types of big hits are likely to occur. As described above, the “short-time gaming state” is a right-side advantageous state in which a player hitting a game ball in the right region of the game area 10 is more likely to win a big hit than in a left-side region. 5 is performed in accordance with the message displayed on the screen 5 and the voice guidance output from the speaker 24.

  When the player makes a right strike in the “short-time gaming state” and the game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 passes through the gate 16, normal symbol determination is performed. When it is determined that the second starting port 12 is opened when the normal symbol determination is performed in the “short-time gaming state”, the opening time of the second starting port 12 is longer than that in the “normal gaming state”. A game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 easily wins the second starting port 12.

  In the “short time gaming state”, when the special symbol is not variably displayed and the game ball is won at the second starting port 12 when the special game is not being performed, the second special symbol determination is performed and the second special symbol display is performed. After the special symbol is variably displayed on the device 42, the determination symbol indicating the result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that a small winning is determined by the second special symbol determination, the small special symbol indicating that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and the specific area 9 and the V winning opening 92 are temporarily displayed. The small hit game to be opened is executed, and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, so that two kinds of big hits are made, and the second special game including the small hit game is executed. Then, the game state is set at the end of the second special game according to the type of the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 at the time of the small hit game. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 4, the “short-time gaming state” is continued at a rate of 70% after the second special game is completed, while the remaining 30% is “from the short-time gaming state” to “ It will be returned to the “normal gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, one small hit game and seven long open times, as illustrated in FIG. 4, as a short hit when the game will be controlled in the normal game state after the end of the second special game. There is provided per short 8R when the normal game state is reached after the round game is performed, and 30% per two kinds of big is per short 8R at this time. In addition, after the second special game, the game will be controlled in the short-time game state. As the short-time game, after one small hit game and 14 long open round games are performed, There are 2 types per 8R with a short time after a small hit game and 7 long open round games per short time, and 70% per 2 types Is one of these two types of time savings.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, even when the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is performed 100 times in the “short-time gaming state”, the gaming state is not The “normal game state” is returned from the “short-time game state”.

[Configuration example of presentation means of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 has various functions such as a main liquid crystal display device 5, a sub liquid crystal display device 6, a logo accessory 7, a speaker 24, and a frame lamp 25. Is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 6 and the logo accessory 7 constitute a movable accessory. This possible accessory functions as an accessory for performing a jackpot finalizing effect as described later.

  The main liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided at a position that is easily visible by a player. In the main liquid crystal display device 5, for example, various displays such as a decorative symbol for notifying the result of the special symbol determination, a character or item for performing a notice effect, a hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is held, etc. An effect image including the object is displayed.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 6 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided above the main liquid crystal display device 5. As the sub liquid crystal display device 6, one having a display screen smaller than that of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used. The sub liquid crystal display device 6 is mainly used for a performance announcement effect for an effect performed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  In the present embodiment, a case where both the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 are configured by a liquid crystal display device will be described. However, both or one of them is another type such as an EL display device. You may comprise by an image display apparatus.

  The logo accessory 7 is configured to be movable with respect to the sub liquid crystal display device 6, and for the purpose of guiding the player's line of sight to the sub liquid crystal display device 6, a performance announcement effect is performed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Operates to vibrate prior to being touched.

  The speaker 24 produces a sound effect by outputting music, sound, sound effects, etc. so as to synchronize with the display effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6. The frame lamp 25 produces an effect by light by changing a light emission color, a light emission pattern, and a light emission direction.

[Configuration example of operation means of the pachinko gaming machine 1]
The frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as operation means operated by the player. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for instructing one of up, down, left and right directions. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is a case where an effect corresponding to the operation information input from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is performed.

[Main features of production performed on pachinko machine 1]
Hereinafter, the main features of effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a gaming system in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed. As illustrated in FIG. 5, in the so-called pachinko hall, one island is configured by arranging a plurality (for example, 20) of the above-described pachinko gaming machines 1 side by side. Each pachinko machine 1 installed on this island is electrically connected to the island power supply device 500 through a common island power supply line. Therefore, by turning on the power of the island power supply device 500 with the individual power switch of each pachinko gaming machine 1 set to “ON”, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island can be combined. Can be activated. As will be described in detail later, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment can start the same production at the same time in all the pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on the same island by using such an activation method. It has a configuration to do.

  FIG. 6 is a screen diagram for explaining the flow of effects performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5. For example, when the game ball is won at the first starting port 11 and the first special symbol determination is performed in the “normal gaming state”, the first special symbol display 41 is displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. The decorative symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination is stopped at the timing when the determination symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 after the decorative symbol is variably displayed as the special symbol is displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 6A).

[Screen structure of normal production mode]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an effect mode related to a game, a normal effect mode mainly including a game effect such as a change effect or a jackpot effect executed in accordance with a change display of a special symbol, and a predetermined effect mode. At a given date and time, a special production mode mainly consisting of special production executed separately from these game productions is constructed. This game effect corresponds to a normal effect.

The special effect of this embodiment is to perform a music performance effect that is a singing stage of a singer group, for example (for example, for 5 minutes). In addition, a performance announcement effect (for example, one minute) is performed as a special effect prior to the music performance effect. Then, in the state where all songs are released, the next performance announcement effect (for example, 5 seconds) is performed in which the next performance performance announcement is performed as a special effect after the completion of the music performance effect. The next performance announcement effect is an effect executed as part of the music performance effect, and will be described later with reference to FIG.
The period during which the special effect is executed is the special effect mode, and the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect (which may include the next performance announcement effect) correspond to the special effect.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing screen configurations in the normal effect mode and the special effect mode.
FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a screen configuration in the normal effect mode.
As shown in FIG. 6A, in the normal effect mode, the display screen 114a of the main liquid crystal display device 5 in the game effect includes a background P11, a decorative symbol P12, a reserved ball display P13, a character P14, an item P15, and the like. A game effect image composed of element images is displayed. Then, using this game effect image, game effects are sequentially performed with a predetermined effect time based on the progress of the game based on the result of the lottery. In this game effect, a jackpot notice that is a notice suggesting that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high and a jackpot confirmation effect that suggests that the jackpot has been confirmed are executed.

  The background P11 is formed over the entire screen. The background P11 constitutes a scene behind another element image, a frame of the display screen 114a, and the like. The decorative symbol P12, the reserved ball display P13, the character P14, the item P15, and the like are displayed so as to overlap the background P11.

The decorative symbol P12 is composed of three symbols. For example, a single digit of “1” to “9” is variably displayed on each symbol. When the decorative symbol changes, for example, the numerical value of each symbol is cyclically forwarded from the top to the bottom, and a display such as scrolling on the display screen 114a is performed. And the numerical value of each symbol is fixed in the stop symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is presented by the combination of these numerical values. Usually, a stop symbol having three identical numbers is a symbol representing a hit.
Then, as shown in FIG. 6A, the decoration pattern P12 of the game effect displays decorations on the numbers or displays the face images of the members of the singer group on the numbers. In the illustrated example, numbers are displayed for each symbol, but various symbols such as characters, symbols, and marks other than numbers may be displayed.

The holding ball display P13 is composed of, for example, four marks. Each mark is increased or decreased according to the number of holdings. For example, one mark is displayed if the number of holds is one, and four marks are displayed if the number of holds is four.
And since the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a singer group, the reserved ball display P13 of the game effect is composed of marks with a recording disk as a motif.

The character P14 operates on the display screen 114a to provide information to the player. In the present embodiment, an image simulating a fan of a singer group is displayed as the character P14.
Moreover, in this embodiment, the result of the preliminary determination process as a notice effect of a lottery result is displayed using the character P14 and the holding ball display P13, for example. For example, the character P14 operates so as to throw a heart. Further, under certain conditions, the thrown “heart” is caught by a specific mark constituting the holding ball display P13. In this way, the lottery result of the reserved ball of the specific mark displayed together with the “heart” suggests that there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit, for example.

  The item P15 is an image displayed on the display screen 114a under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, for example, by causing the item P15 to appear, for example, the reliability of the jackpot of the lottery result in the current symbol variation is suggested.

[Screen structure of special production mode]
FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a screen configuration in a performance announcement effect that is a special effect executed in the special effect mode, and FIG. 6C is a music performance effect that is a special effect executed in the special effect mode. It is a figure which shows a screen structure.
As shown in FIGS. 6 (B) and 6 (C), on the display screen 114a in the special effect mode, a game effect image composed of element images such as the background P21, the decorative symbol P22, and the reserved ball display P23 is displayed. indicate. In the special effect mode, the game effect is performed using the game effect image.
Furthermore, a special effect image which is special effect data composed of element images of the performance announcement effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48 is displayed on the display screen 114a in the special effect mode. In the special effect mode, a special effect is performed using the special effect image.

In the special effect mode, the area of the display screen 114a includes an area for displaying the special effect image (hereinafter referred to as “upper area”) and an area for displaying the game effect image (hereinafter referred to as “lower area”). Is displayed on the image display unit 114. In the present embodiment, the area of the lower region A2 is made smaller than that of the upper region A1.
In the special effect mode, as shown in FIGS. 6B and 6C, the special effect image is displayed in the upper area A1 and the game effect image is displayed in the lower area A2 on the area division screen. The special effect image and the game effect image are simultaneously displayed on the display screen 114a.

  The background P21 is formed over the entire screen as shown in FIGS. 6 (B) and 6 (C). The background P21 is displayed in each of the upper area A1 and the lower area A2, and constitutes a scene behind. The background P21 also constitutes an image that displays the boundary between the upper area A1 and the lower area A2 in the area division screen.

  The decorative design P22 is displayed in the lower area A2, as shown in FIG. 6 (B). The decorative symbol P22 is displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P12 of the game effect. Further, the decorative symbol P22 in the special effect mode is simplified from the decorative symbol P12 of the game effect. In the present embodiment, the decorative design P22 is expressed by a dot display constituted by a set of a plurality of dots. Thus, unlike the decoration pattern P12 in the normal effect mode, the decoration pattern P22 in the special effect mode is configured by a simple display that does not involve the decoration of numbers or the display of the character image.

  The reserved ball display P23 is displayed in the lower area A2, as shown in FIG. 6 (B). The reserved ball display P23 is displayed smaller than the reserved ball display P13 in the normal effect mode. Further, the reserved ball display P23 is more simplified than the reserved ball display P13 in the normal effect mode. For example, the reserved ball display P23 is configured by a simple circle that is not decorated unlike the reserved ball display P13 in the normal effect mode.

  In the present embodiment, the lower area A2 is set to have a smaller area than the upper area A1. Along with this, the display of the decorative pattern P22 and the reserved ball display P23 becomes relatively small. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display of the decorative symbols P22 and the reserved ball display P23 is simplified without being complicated so that the player can easily recognize the decorative symbols P22 and the reserved ball display P23 displayed in a small size.

  In the special effect mode, display of the character P14 and the item P15 displayed in the normal effect mode is prohibited. In the special effect mode, the area of the lower area A2 is set smaller than that of the upper area A1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, based on the priority of whether the information is important for the player, only a part of the information included in the element images constituting the game effect image displayed on the display screen 114a in the normal effect mode is displayed. Like to do.

  For example, the decoration symbol P22 or the like displays the result of the lottery in the game and is important information for the player. Further, the holding ball display P23 is information for informing the number of lotteries held and is considered to have high priority for the player. On the other hand, for example, the character P14 has a low priority as important information for the player when compared with the decorative pattern P22 that displays the lottery result itself. In the present embodiment, in this special effect, only the decorative symbol P22 and the reserved ball display P23 having higher priority among the game effect images are displayed.

The performance notification effect image P47 is a performance image of the performance notification effect in the special effect mode, as shown in FIG. 6B. The performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed in the upper area A1. The performance announcement effect image P47 displays the name of the song to be performed (“early winter memory” in the figure) and the remaining time (“48 seconds” in the example in the figure) until the performance announcement effect is started.
By performing the performance notification effect using the performance notification effect image P47, it is possible to know in advance that a special effect different from the game proceeding according to the result of the lottery is performed for the player who is playing the game. it can. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which no game is performed, it can be expected that a player is invited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the performance announcement effect.

The music performance effect image P48 is an effect image of the music performance effect in the special effect mode, as shown in FIG. The music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the upper area A1. In the present embodiment, the music performance effect image P48 is an image configured by a singing stage by a singer group. Note that music is played from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 1) in synchronization with the display of the music performance effect image P48.
In addition, in the lower right of the music performance effect image P48 in FIG. 6C, the remaining time until the music performance effect is always displayed is counted down, and the player can enjoy the music performance effect while enjoying the music performance effect. It is possible to recognize the remaining time until ending.
The countdown display for 60 seconds displayed in this performance notification effect corresponds to a third remaining time notification (countdown notification) for prompting the player of the start time of the music performance effect.

  As described above, in the normal effect mode, the normal effect using the main liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, the frame lamp 25, and the like is executed in accordance with the game using the game ball as the game medium. Here, the normal effect includes both a variation effect associated with a special symbol variation display and a winning effect associated with a special game. Note that the image in the normal effect mode is displayed in the entire area in the present embodiment when only the normal effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a measurement process for measuring an elapsed time since the power is turned on is performed, and after the first set time (about 59 minutes in the present embodiment) has passed since the power is turned on, Prior to the performance production (see FIG. 6C), a performance notification production is performed in which the performance of the music performance is announced. This performance announcement effect is related to the performance of the music performance and the content of the performance. In this embodiment, the performance of the document video of the new song reproduced in the performance performance of the music is played back. In addition, in the performance announcement effect in the present embodiment, the remaining time until the music performance effect is started is displayed in a countdown manner (see FIG. 6B). In the present embodiment, this performance announcement effect image is displayed in the upper area A1, which is a part of the entire area. In addition, the countdown display of the remaining time until the music performance effect is started is also performed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (see FIG. 9C).

  In the present embodiment, the case where the performance announcement effect is realized by movie playback of a document video of a new song will be described. However, if the performance announcement effect is related to the music performance effect, for example, the music performance effect Other effects such as an effect of playing a movie of a scene prepared by a member who sings a new song in a dressing room may be used as an effect suggesting the contents of the action.

  Next, at the timing when the second set time (1 hour in the present embodiment) has passed since the power is turned on, a music performance effect (playing a new song movie in the present embodiment) is started to perform a new song as unperformed content. (See FIG. 6C). Unlike the performance announcement effect, this music performance effect is forcibly started when the second set time elapses after the power is turned on, regardless of the game situation using the game ball. For this reason, it is possible to simultaneously start a musical performance performance on these pachinko gaming machines 1 by simultaneously starting a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island using the island power supply device 500. It is.

By the way, the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect, which are special effects performed in the special effect mode, are effects performed independently of the game using the game ball, but the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect are performed. Since the game using the game ball is continued while the game is in progress, it is necessary to make the normal performance for the game parallel to the performance announcement performance or the music performance performance. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 1, the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect are performed using the upper area A1 from the start of the performance announcement effect until the end of the subsequent music performance effect. A normal effect is performed using the lower area A2 of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (see FIGS. 6B and 6C).
As described above, the image of the music performance effect is displayed in the same upper area A1 as the image of the performance notification effect is displayed, whereas the image of the normal effect is displayed until the performance notification effect is started. While displayed in the entire area, after the performance announcement effect is started, it is displayed in the lower area A2 located below the upper area A1. In the present embodiment, in order to make the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect stand out, a decorative pattern or the like of the normal effect is displayed in dots in the lower area A2.

  In the special effect mode, during the performance announcement effect or during the music performance effect, the jackpot notice and the jackpot finalizing effect specific to the special effect mode different from the normal effect mode are executed.

  When the music performance effect ends, the normal effect mode is entered, and the normal effect is performed using the lower area A2, and the normal effect is returned using the entire area. In the normal performance in the normal performance mode after the music performance performance is performed, the performance based on the new song performed in the music performance performance is performed. That is, the production data related to the new song that was not used in the normal production before the start of the music performance production can be used when the music performance production is executed.

  Note that the musical performance performance is not executed only when one hour has passed since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. In the present embodiment, the music performance performance is 1 after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. It is executed every time. That is, when a musical performance performance of “early winter memory”, which is a new song A, is executed when one hour has passed since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the new song A is “every hour,” Music performance performance of "Early Winter Memory" will be performed. Also, the performance performance for one new song is continued for one week after the first performance performance of the new song is performed, and the performance performance of other new songs is performed every hour for the next week. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by repeating such processing, music performance effects for all 12 new songs are executed over a period of about 3 months. It will increase.

  In the following description, the entire area on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is simply referred to as “entire area”, and the upper area A1 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is simply referred to as “upper area A1”. The lower area A2 on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 is simply referred to as “lower area A2”.

FIG. 7 is a screen diagram showing how the special effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is reduced and displayed under a specific condition.
If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the special symbol determination in the entire area between the start time of the performance announcement production and the start time of the music performance production, it is accompanied by the execution of the special symbol determination next to this special symbol determination. If the display mode of the normal effect is switched to the dot display in the lower area A2 when starting the variation display of the decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the interest of the normal effect from being impaired. On the other hand, if the information necessary for the game using the game ball is not properly notified, the performance notification effect and the music performance effect may interfere with the game.

  For this reason, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 7A, when a big hit occurs during a performance announcement performance or a music performance performance and it is necessary to notify the player to make a right strike, The opening image that is the game effect image that is the normal effect data is displayed not in the dot display in the lower area A2, but in the entire area, and the music performance effect image P48 (or the performance announcement effect image P47) is superimposed on the opening image. It is supposed to be reduced in size.

  Further, as exemplified in FIG. 7B, for example, a round in which a “challenge chance” is performed, which is a big hit and an effect of whether or not to shorten the time during the performance announcement performance or the music performance performance. In this case, when it is necessary to notify the player that the “challenge chance” is to be performed, the challenge chance image that is the game effect image is displayed in the entire area instead of the dot display in the lower area A2. At the same time, the music performance effect image P48 (or the performance notification effect image P47) is reduced and displayed so as to be superimposed on the P48 challenge chance image.

In addition, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 7C, a round in which a jackpot is being made and an announcement is made that it is determined that the time-short state has been decided during the performance announcement performance or the music performance performance. In this case, when it is necessary to notify the player that the time reduction state has been determined, the time reduction state determination image, which is a game effect image, is displayed in the entire area instead of the dot display in the lower area A2. At the same time, the music performance effect image P48 (or the performance notification effect image P47) is reduced and displayed so as to be superimposed on the time reduction state determination image.
7A to 7C, the music performance effect remaining time until the music performance effect is ended is also counted down in the music performance effect image P48 displayed in a reduced scale.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow of a music performance effect performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in order to show the flow of the musical performance performance in an easy-to-understand manner, FIG. 8 shows the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on at 9:00 am. Further, for the convenience of explanation, illustration of a performance announcement effect executed prior to the music performance effect is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced into the pachinko hall on Saturday, 11/23, for example, the default normal performance is performed until one week has passed since the introduction. For example, two types of background images, a first default background image and a second default background image, are stored in advance as background images to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 in a state where the music performance performance has never been performed. Until the first music performance effect of “early winter memory”, which is the new song A, is executed, either the first default background image or the second default background image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  Then, on the Saturday of 11/30, one week after the pachinko gaming machine 1 was introduced into the pachinko hall, when 3 hours passed since the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned on, a new song was created in the special performance mode. The first musical performance performance of A (“Early Winter Memory”) is executed (see FIG. 8B). In FIG. 8 (B), since the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at 9:00 am, the first song performance performance of the new song A is performed at exactly noon, and then the song performance of the new song A is performed every hour thereafter. An example in which an effect is executed is shown.

  When the first music performance effect of the new song A is executed, the normal effect that mainly uses the image data related to the new song A is performed in the normal effect mode. In other words, taking the background image as an example, only two background images, the first default background image and the second default background image, could be used, but the image constituting the movie data of the new song A to be played in the music performance performance A new song A background image created in advance based on the data can be newly used. Since the new song A background image is set to have a higher selection rate than the first default background image and the second default background image for one week when the musical performance performance of the new song A is performed, the first default background image and the second default image It is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 at a higher rate than the default background image.

  Subsequently, on Saturday, 12/7, when one week has passed since the first performance performance of the new song A was executed, when 3 hours have passed since the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned on, The first song performance performance of “Winter Vacation”, which is the new song B, is executed (see FIG. 8C).

  When the first music performance effect of “Winter Vacation”, which is the new song B, is executed, a normal effect that mainly uses image data related to the new song B is performed in the normal effect mode. In other words, the background image will be described as an example. Although the three default images of the first default background image, the second default background image, and the new song A background image can be used, the first default background image cannot be used. Instead, a new song B background image created in advance based on the image data constituting the movie data of the new song B to be reproduced in the music performance effect can be newly used. Since the new song B background image is set to have a higher selection rate than the second default background image and the new song A background image for one week when the performance of the new song B is performed, the second default background image and the new song A background are set. It is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 at a higher rate than the image.

  Thus, every time the first music performance effect of each new song is executed, the available background images increase, and the background image related to the latest new song is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 at the highest rate.

  Note that the music performance production schedule illustrated in FIG. 8 is an example, and the first music performance performance of the new song A is performed on the first day of the introduction of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the time interval at which the music performance performance of the same new music is performed. It is also possible to make a change such as making the time other than one hour or a non-constant time.

  FIG. 9 is a screen diagram illustrating an example of a notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6. For example, on the day before Saturday of 11/30 when the first music performance effect of the new song A is performed, as shown in FIG. 9A, a notification effect image P49 for notifying the remaining days until the first music performance effect date is displayed. A notification effect to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is executed. Further, for example, on the Saturday of 11/30 when the first song performance production of the new song A is performed, the first song performance production is performed today as illustrated in FIG. 9B until the first song performance production starts. A notification effect for causing the sub-liquid crystal display device 6 to display the notification effect image P49 for notifying the user is executed. Further, for example, when the remaining time until the start time of the performance performance of the new song A becomes less than a predetermined time, the remaining time is counted down on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 as illustrated in FIG. 9C. The notification effect is executed by the notification effect image P49 to be performed. Also, for example, when the first music performance effect of the new song A is finished, a notification effect image P49 for notifying that the first music performance effect of the next new song B will be performed one week later is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Production is performed.

  Thus, in the sub liquid crystal display device 6, various notification effects relating to the music performance effect are executed.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the performance of the music performance in the state where all the songs are released, which is performed in the pachinko machine 1 after all the new songs are performed. As shown in FIG. 8D, when the first song performance performance of the twelfth new song L is performed, the music performance performance is performed every hour from 2/22 Saturday when one week has passed since that day. The types of new songs to be performed change sequentially (see FIG. 10). And as illustrated in FIGS. 10A to 10D, the music performance effect of the new song A is performed on 1/22 Saturday when 1 hour has passed since the power is turned on. The performance of the new song B is performed on 1/23 Sunday when 1 hour has passed since the power is turned on, and the performance of the new song C is performed on 1/24 Monday when 1 hour has passed since the power is turned on. As such, even during the same time period, the type of new song performed varies from day to day.

Therefore, from the first performance performance of the new song A until the completion of the one-week performance performance of the new song L, the performance performance of all the songs that could not be enjoyed without playing every week in one day. I can enjoy it.
Also, from the new song A on Saturday, 2/22, when the performance of the music performance ends, the next performance announcement performance for the next performance performance (one hour later) will be part of the performance performance of the music. To be executed.
The next performance announcement performance will be described with reference to FIG. 10A as an example. When the performance performance of the new song A is started at 10:00 and this performance performance performance ends, the performance performance of the new song B is continued next time. The next performance announcement production is performed to notify that the production will be performed. Then, when the performance performance of the new song B is started at 11:00 and the performance performance of the new song C is finished, the next performance announcement performance is performed to notify that the performance performance of the new song C will be performed next time. In this way, the next performance announcement effect is executed.

  In addition, since the type of new song to be performed varies depending on the day even in the same time zone, even players who can play only during a certain time zone can enjoy the performance performance of various types of new songs. .

  Hereinafter, the internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the processing performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for realizing execution of the above-described normal performance, performance notification performance, music performance performance, and notification performance will be described in detail.

[Configuration of control device of pachinko gaming machine 1]
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls to be paid out as prize balls. As illustrated in FIG. 11, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is based on a game control board 100 that controls execution of determination, command transmission processing to the effect control board 130, and the command received from the game control board 100. An effect control board 130 that controls the production in an integrated manner, an image sound control board 140 that controls the production of images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 that controls the production of various lamps and logo accessories 7, and the like. . In the present embodiment, the game control board 100 functions as a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 function as an effect control unit that controls the effect. .

[Configuration of Game Control Board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, and a main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to determination and the number of payout balls based on a program stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The game control board 100 includes a first start port switch 111, a second start port switch 112, an electric tulip opening / closing unit 113, a gate switch 114, a big winning port switch 115, a big winning port control unit 116, a normal winning port switch 117, The specific prize opening switch 118, the specific area opening / closing part 119, the V prize opening switch 120, the lose prize opening switch 121, the V prize opening opening / closing part 122, and the respective indicators 41 to 43, 45 to 47 constituting the display 4 are connected. Has been.

  The first start port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won the first start port 11 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that a game ball has won the second start port 12 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The electric tulip opening / closing part 113 opens and closes the second start port 12 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. To do. The gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The big prize opening switch 115 detects that a game ball has won the big prize opening 13 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. In response to a control signal from the game control board 100, the special prize opening control unit 116 opens and closes the special prize opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to a plate that closes the special prize opening 13 so as to be able to transmit the drive. To do. The normal winning port switch 117 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning port 14, and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100.

  The specific winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has won the specific winning opening 19 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The specific area opening / closing unit 119 opens and closes the specific winning opening 19 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the blade member 90 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. The V winning opening switch 120 detects that a game ball has won the V winning opening 92 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The lose prize winning switch 121 detects that the game ball has won the lose prize winning opening 93 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The V winning opening / closing unit 122 opens and closes the V winning opening 92 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the slide member 94 so as to be able to transmit driving.

  The main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 detects from the first starting port switch 111, the second starting port switch 112, the big winning port switch 115, the normal winning port switch 117, the V winning port switch 120, or the lose prize port switch 121. When the signal is input, the payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won, and based on the information from the payout control board, Manage the number.

  This payout control board is configured to have a drive motor or the like that sends out a prize ball from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2 to the tray 28.

  The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, the main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. If it is determined that the winning game is a big win, the special winning opening 13 is opened and closed via the special winning opening control unit 116.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 opens and closes the specific winning opening 19 by operating the blade member 90 via the specific area opening / closing unit 119, The V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by operating the slide member 94 via the V winning opening opening / closing section 122. When the game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the operation of the slide member 94, the big winning opening 13 is opened and closed via the big winning opening control section 116, as in the case where it is determined that the game is a big win.

  Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. And when it determines with opening the 2nd starting port 12, the 2nd starting port 12 is opened temporarily by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing part 113.

  Further, the main CPU 101 causes the respective display devices 41 to 43 and 45 to 47 constituting the display device 4 to execute the processing described above with reference to FIG.

  Further, a radio wave detection sensor (not shown) for detecting an electromagnetic wave having a predetermined electric field strength or higher in a predetermined band is connected to the game control board 100, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) for detecting a magnetic force having a predetermined strength or higher is connected. The main CPU 100 executes error output processing in accordance with the detection status of these sensors. The error output processing includes error display processing for displaying an error in the main liquid crystal display device 5, error sound output processing by sound output, and error signal output for outputting a signal to an equipment device such as an external management computer. Processing.

  The main CPU 100 confirms the detection status of the game balls in the first start port switch 111, the second start port switch 112, the big winning port switch 115, the normal winning port switch 117, and the specific winning port switch 118, for example, for 1 minute. When the predetermined number or more of the game balls are detected, or when a game ball is detected at the closed winning opening, etc., the error output process described above is executed by determining that an illegal prize has occurred. .

[Configuration of Production Control Board 130]
The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. The sub CPU 131 performs a calculation process when controlling the presentation based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 134 operates with this power when the power from the island power supply device 500 is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when the power from the island power supply device 500 is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Timekeeping operation is performed by electric power supplied from a backup power source composed of a capacitor (not shown) incorporated in the machine 1.
For this reason, the RTC 134 can measure the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not turned on.

Note that a built-in battery may be provided in place of the backup power source, and the RTC 134 may be operated by power supplied from the built-in battery.
By replacing the built-in battery, it is possible to increase the discharge capacity that can be stored compared to the backup power supply. Therefore, the RTC 134 can maintain a sufficient life even with the built-in battery alone.
Even in this case, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is supplied, the RTC 134 performs a measurement operation using the power supplied from the island power supply device 500, and when the power of the pachinko machine is not supplied, By performing the measurement operation with the built-in battery, it is possible to extend the life as compared with the case where only the built-in battery is used as the measurement operation power source, and while the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 Since the measurement operation is more stable than when the power is not supplied to the power source, the time deviation is reduced.

  As will be described in detail later, the overall CPU 141 (see FIG. 12) of the image sound control board 140 acquires information indicating the current date and time (hereinafter referred to as “RTC information”) from the RTC 134, and performs the above-described performance announcement. Controls production and performance performance. The RTC 134 corresponds to a time measuring means.

  The sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets the effect contents of the normal effect based on the game information related to the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the special game, etc. transmitted from the game control board 100. In that case, the input of the operation information from the production | presentation button 26 or the production | presentation key 27 may be received, and the production | generation content according to the operation information may be set. Further, the sub CPU 131 transmits a command for instructing execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. In the present embodiment, the setting of the content of the performance notification effect and the music performance effect described above is performed not on the effect control board 130 but on the image sound control board 140.

[Configuration of Lamp Control Board 150]
Although not shown in the drawing, the lamp control board 150 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM. The CPU of the lamp control board 150 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operation of the frame lamp 25 and the logo accessory 7 based on a program stored in the ROM. The RAM of the lamp control board 150 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU executes the program or a work area for data processing.

  The ROM of the lamp control board 150 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating the light emission patterns of the light emitting elements included in the frame lamp 25 and the logo accessory 7. The operation pattern data is data indicating an operation pattern of the logo accessory 7.

  The CPU of the lamp control board 150 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM, and emits light from the frame lamp 25 and the logo accessory 7. Controls the light emission of the device. The CPU of the lamp control board 150 reads out the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the ROM, and operates the logo accessory 7. Control the drive.

[Configuration of Image Sound Control Board 140]
FIG. 12 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the image sound control board 140. The image sound control board 140 performs image display control of the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 and audio output control from the speaker 24. The image sound control board 140 includes a general CPU 141, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 142, an sound DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 143, a control ROM 144, a control RAM 145, a sound ROM 146, an SDRAM 147, and a VRAM 149.

  The overall CPU 141 stores the image data stored in the CGROM 148 with respect to the VDP 142 based on the programs and various tables stored in the control ROM 144, the commands received from the effect control board 130, and the RTC information acquired from the RTC 134. An instruction to display on the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is given. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list.

  Here, the display list is composed of commands for instructing execution of drawing in frame units. The type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The processing for creating this display list will be described in detail later.

  The overall CPU 141 instructs the sound DSP 143 to output the sound data stored in the sound ROM 146 from the speaker 24.

  The control ROM 144 is configured by a mask ROM, and stores a control program for the overall CPU 141, a display list generation program for generating a display list, various tables (see FIG. 37), and the like.

  The control RAM 145 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the general CPU 141 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The CGROM 148 stores effect data necessary for executing a normal effect, a performance announcement effect, a music performance effect, a notification effect, and the like. The CGROM 148 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and includes sprite data (one piece of image data) including a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels), and a plurality of pieces of image data. Compressed and stored movie data consisting of a collection of The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 148 stores, without compressing, palette data or the like in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other.

  In this CGROM 148, music performance effect movie data and performance notification effect movie data are individually stored for each new song as data for performing a song performance effect and a performance announcement effect.

  Based on the display list created by the overall CPU 141, the VDP 142 identifies which new song performance announcement effect and execution of the song performance effect have been instructed, and movie data for performance announcement effect and movie performance effect movie of the identified new song. Data is read from the CGROM 148 and reproduced.

  Further, the CGROM 148 stores normal effect data and special effect data as sprite data used for generating a normal effect image. The normal effect data is default data that can be used regardless of whether or not the music performance effect is performed, and image data of the first default background image and the second default background image corresponds to this. On the other hand, the special performance data is sprite data (for example, image data of a new song A background image and a new song B background image) that can be used only after the first performance of the music performance is performed. It is memorized individually. The special effect data is generated in advance by editing the image data constituting the music performance effect movie data.

  In the present embodiment, in order to increase the appearance rate of the normal effect using the newly available special effect data as much as possible, the normal effect using the normal effect data every time the usable special effect data increases. The display list creation table is switched every time the first song performance performance of a new song is performed so that the appearance rate of the normal performance using the normal performance data will eventually become zero, gradually decreasing the appearance rate of Selection is performed. This special selection will be described in detail later.

  The VDP 142 reads normal effect data or special effect data from the CGROM 148 based on the display list created by the overall CPU 141, and executes a drawing process for performing the normal effect. Since the special performance data is not read when the first music performance performance has never been performed, a drawing process using the normal performance data is performed. For example, a default background image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5. Is displayed. On the other hand, for example, when the initial performance performance of the new song A is performed, the special performance data for the new song A is read, and the drawing process using the special performance data is performed, for example, the background of the new song A An image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the use restriction of the special performance data of the new song is released when the initial performance performance performance of the new song is performed.

  Note that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM 148 may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 149 is configured by an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and includes a display list storage area 1491, a development storage area 1492, a full screen frame buffer 1493, a reduced image frame buffer 1494, a main liquid crystal display. And a sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496.

  The display list storage area 1491 temporarily stores the display list output from the overall CPU 141. The expanded storage area 1492 stores image data that has been read from the CGROM 148 and expanded. The full screen frame buffer 1493 is a drawing frame buffer for drawing an image displayed in the entire area. The reduced image frame buffer 1494 is a game effect image (see FIG. 7) reduced and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and a special effect image (performance announcement effect image P47 or music performance) displayed reduced on the main liquid crystal display device 5. This is a drawing frame buffer for drawing the effect image P48). The main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 is a display frame buffer that temporarily stores image data transferred from the full-screen frame buffer 1493 (and the reduced image frame buffer 1494). The sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 is a frame buffer used for both drawing and display for drawing and displaying the image data displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  The VDP 142 decompresses the image data stored in a compressed state in the CGROM 148 and stores the decompressed image data in the expanded storage area 1492. Also, the VDP 142 performs drawing processing using the full screen frame buffer 1493, the reduced image frame buffer 1494, or the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 based on the display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. The VDP 142 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the display frame buffer (main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 or sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496) in the VRAM 149. The processed RGB signals are output to the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  Connected to the acoustic DSP 143 are an acoustic ROM 146 for storing various acoustic data relating to music, voice, sound effects, etc., and an SDRAM 147 used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 143. The acoustic DSP 143 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the instruction from the overall CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM 146 to the SDRAM 147, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 24.

[Drawing process of VDP 142]
Next, a drawing process executed by the VDP 142 and an image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing process 1 which is a drawing process in the normal performance mode. When the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect described above are not performed, the following drawing process 1 is executed in units of frames by the VDP 142 based on the display list for the main liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1491. . That is, as illustrated in FIG. 13, the VDP 142 includes, for example, a first image indicating a decorative symbol and a character, a second image as a background image indicating a background such as a decorative symbol, and a third image as a character image. Are read from the CGROM 148, stored in the expanded storage area 1492, and a game effect image obtained by synthesizing these images using the Z buffer method or the like is drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1493.

  Note that the reduced image frame buffer 1494 needs to reduce and display the game effect image under specific conditions during the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect, which is a special effect executed in the special effect mode, and When it is necessary to reduce and display the performance notification effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48 under specific conditions during the performance by the game performance image, and during the performance of the performance announcement and music performance effects, the game When the effect image is displayed in the entire area and the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48 needs to be displayed in a reduced size, it is a frame buffer used for the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect. It is not used when there is no normal performance mode.

  For this reason, in the normal performance mode in which the performance announcement performance or the music performance performance is not performed, the VDP 142 transfers the game performance image drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1493 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495, and has a predetermined display timing. Are output to the main liquid crystal display device 5 as RGB signals. Then, while the image in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 is being output to the main liquid crystal display device 5, the game effect image of the next frame is drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1493.

  Further, the VDP 142 reads out a notification effect image related to the music performance effect from the CGROM 148 based on the display list for the sub liquid crystal stored in the display list storage region 1491 and stores it in the development storage region 1492. The character image indicating the remaining days until the date when the first performance performance is performed and the remaining time until the performance performance is started is synthesized and drawn in the sub-liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 using the Z buffer method or the like. . Then, the composite effect rendering effect image P49 is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 6 as an RGB signal at a predetermined display timing.

  In order to efficiently execute the drawing process, image data frequently used in the drawing process may be buffered in the expanded storage area 1492.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing process 2 which is a drawing process in the special effect mode. In the special effect mode, the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect described above is performed. Therefore, in this special effect mode, the following display is performed by the VDP 142 based on the display list for the main liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1491. Such a drawing process 2 is executed for each frame. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, the VDP 142 is, for example, a pre-rendered special effect image (performance announcement effect image P47 or music performance effect image P48) and a dot effect image for displaying a game effect image in dots. Are read from the CGROM 148 and stored in the expanded storage area 1492, and these images are drawn together in the full-screen frame buffer 1493. At that time, the special effect image is drawn in the area corresponding to the upper area A1, and the dot effect image is drawn in the area corresponding to the lower area A2.

  Note that when the normal effect is performed by the dot effect image, the game effect image displayed in the entire area does not need to be displayed in a reduced size, and the reduced image frame buffer 1494 is not used here either.

  For this reason, when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is being performed, the VDP 142 transfers the special effect image and the dot effect image drawn in the full-screen frame buffer 1493 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 for a predetermined display. The RGB signal is output to the main liquid crystal display device 5 at the timing. Then, while the image in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 is being output to the main liquid crystal display device 5, the special effect image and the dot effect image of the next frame are drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1493.

  The VDPU 142 draws the notification effect image P49 in the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 and outputs it to the sub liquid crystal display device 6 in the same manner as when the performance notification effect and the music performance effect are not performed. Note that when the music performance effect is being performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5, a process of counting down the remaining time until the music performance effect is started is not necessarily required. Instead of P49, a rendering process for causing the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to display an effect image related to the musical performance performance performed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 may be performed.

Next, a drawing process 3 and a drawing process 4 which are drawing processes in the special effect mode will be described with reference to FIG.
First, scenes using these drawing processes will be described.

First, as an example, the drawing process 4 described above is used when a big hit occurs during the performance announcement performance or the music performance performance during the special performance mode, and it is necessary to notify the player to make a right strike. If the notification that prompts the player to make a right strike is performed using the dot effect image, there is a high possibility that the notification that prompts the player to make a right strike is difficult to be transmitted.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the occurrence of such a problem, for example, when it is necessary to perform notification for urging the player to make a right strike during a musical performance performance, a right-handed notification image that is a game effect image. Is displayed in the upper area A2, and the music performance effect image P48 is reduced and superimposed on the right-handed notification image.

  As another example, during the special performance mode, a special performance is performed during the special performance mode, with a variation effect (normal performance) accompanied by a long special symbol variation display such as 2 minutes. If the variation effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol continues even after the announcement effect or the music performance effect is started, the game effect image is displayed before the change effect (normal effect) accompanying the change display of the special symbol is finished. Is switched to dot display, the interest of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol which is the normal effect is lost.

Therefore, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, it is conceivable that the entire area display of the game effect image is continued until the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is finished. This causes another problem that the display of the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48 is delayed (display starts from the intermediate image of the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48). .
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent these problems from occurring, for example, the transition from the normal performance mode to the special performance mode, and the timing at which the performance announcement performance is started or the timing at which the music performance performance is started, If the change display has not ended yet, the special effect image (notification effect image P47, music performance effect image P48) is reduced and superimposed on the game effect image. The performance effect image P48 is displayed in the upper region A1, and the variable display (normal effect) using the dot effect image is started in the lower region A2.
Details including other examples will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing process 3 and the drawing process 4 which are drawing processes in the special effect mode.
When the game effect image is reduced during the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect in the special effect mode described above, the following display is performed by the VDP 142 based on the display list for the main liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1491. Such a drawing process 3 is executed for each frame.
That is, as shown in FIG. 15, the VDP 142 renders the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) in the full screen frame buffer 1493 as described above. In addition, the VDP 142 draws a reduced image obtained by scaling the game effect image including the first image, the second image, and the third image in the reduced image frame buffer 1494.

  Next, the VDP 142 transfers the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1493 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 and also to the reduced image frame buffer 1494. The drawn reduced image is transferred to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495. The VDP 142 outputs the two images thus stored in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 to the main liquid crystal display device 5 together as RGB signals at a predetermined display timing. In addition, the special effect image (the effect notification effect image or the effect image related to the music performance effect) is drawn on the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 and output to the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  In the present embodiment, when the game effect image is reduced and displayed during the special effect mode, the same game effect image as that displayed in the entire area is reduced and displayed in the lower left of the entire area. For this reason, in the lower left area of the full-screen frame buffer 1493, the normal effect is drawn so as to be reduced and displayed.

On the other hand, when shifting to the special effect mode during the above-described normal effect mode and displaying the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) in a reduced size, the main liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1491 is displayed. Based on the display list and the like, the following rendering process 4 is executed by the VDP 142 in units of frames.
That is, as shown in FIG. 15, the VDP 142 renders the game effect image in the full-screen frame buffer 1493 as described above. Further, the VDP 142 draws a reduced image obtained by scaling the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) in the reduced image frame buffer 1494.

  Next, the VDP 142 transfers the game effect image drawn in the full-screen frame buffer 1493 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495, and also reduces the reduced image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance) drawn in the reduced image frame buffer 1494. The effect image P48) is transferred to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495. The VDP 142 outputs the two images thus stored in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 to the main liquid crystal display device 5 together as RGB signals at a predetermined display timing. In addition, a sub special effect image corresponding to each of the special effect images (performance announcement effect image P47 or music performance effect image P48) is drawn in the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 and output to the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  In the present embodiment, when the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) is displayed in a reduced size, the same special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the same as that displayed in the entire area). The music performance effect image P48) is reduced and displayed at the lower left in the entire area. Therefore, the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) is drawn in a reduced size in the lower left area of the full screen frame buffer 1493.

  Note that a frame buffer similar to the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 may be provided separately, and alternately switched between the drawing frame buffer and the display frame buffer.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the VDP 142 performs drawing processing of two effect images displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 will be described. However, the VDP and the sub liquid crystal for the main liquid crystal display device 5 are described. A VDP for the display device 6 may be provided separately.

In this embodiment, the case where the main liquid crystal display list and the sub liquid crystal display list are stored in the display list storage area 1491 will be described. However, in order to store these display lists individually, the display list storage Two regions may be provided.
[Power saving function]

Here, the power saving function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.
When the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 does not receive any command from the main CPU 101 for 180 seconds after transmitting a customer waiting effect start command to be described later, or when the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is not detected. The power saving mode shift command for shifting the power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the normal power mode to the power saving mode for saving power is sent to the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 and the CPU of the lamp control board 150. Send.

The overall CPU 141 that has received this power saving mode transition command lowers the luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 5 by 50% from the luminance of the normal power mode, and turns off the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Then, the overall CPU 141 instructs the VDP 142 to draw an image dedicated to the power saving mode.
In order to reduce power consumption as much as possible, the power-saving mode-dedicated images indicate that power is being saved and that the next song performance will be performed in the central area of the entire area, such as “Under power-saving performance until XX minutes XX seconds”. The remaining time until the start of the game is displayed with characters that are large enough to be recognized by the player who will play the game, and the areas other than the characters are displayed in blank.

  Then, the overall CPU 141 instructs the sound DSP 143 to set the speaker volume to 0. As a result, in the power saving mode, basically no sound is output.

  Further, the CPU of the lamp control board 150 that has received the power saving mode transition command turns off all the light emitting elements. As a result, in the power saving mode, the light emitting element basically does not emit light.

When executing special effects by switching to special effects mode during power saving mode,
The overall CPU 141 instructs the VDP 142 to draw a blank image (displays nothing) and instructs the acoustic DSP 143 to set the speaker volume to 50% of the normal power mode. Therefore, when shifting to the special performance mode and executing the special performance during the power saving mode, sound output is performed at a volume reduced by 50% with respect to the normal power mode.

The general CPU 141 transmits to the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 that the transition to the special effect mode is received, and the sub CPU 131 that has received this transmits to the CPU of the lamp control board 150 that the transition to the special effect mode has been performed. Thus, the CPU of the lamp control board 150 performs light emission output by the number of light emitting elements obtained by thinning out the number of light emitting elements used in the normal effect mode by 70%.
As described above, when the special effect mode is executed in the power saving mode, the special effect without using the liquid crystal display device 5 is executed.
Note that the special effect in the power saving mode may be executed by only one of the audio output and the light emission output.

Further, the power saving performance image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 when the special effect mode is executed during the power saving mode.
In this case, the overall CPU 141 instructs the VDP 142 to draw a power saving performance image. This power-saving performance image can be recognized by the player who will play the game from now on until the start of the performance of the music performance, such as “XX seconds until the start of performance”, while the performance announcement performance is being performed in the central area of the entire area. While displaying in the size of the extent, the area other than this character is displayed blank. And during the performance of the music performance, it is said that the current performance of the music performance and the remaining time until the end of the performance of the music performance, such as “Now △△△ Until the end of the performance XX minutes”, The characters are displayed in a size that can be recognized by the player to perform, and the area other than the characters is displayed in blank.
Also, in the all-track open state, which will be described later, when the performance of the music performance is completed, a game performance announcement that will be executed next time (1 hour later), such as “next time Δ △△ performance”, is performed. The characters are displayed in a size that can be recognized by the user, and the area other than the characters is displayed in a blank.

  In addition, when shifting to the special effect mode and executing the special effect during the power saving mode, the special effect in the normal power mode may be executed by shifting to the normal power mode.

Further, during execution of the special effect in the power saving mode, the special effect in the normal power mode may be executed by shifting to the normal power mode. In this case, for example, when the game is started while the special effect in the power saving mode is being executed, the game is transmitted from the main CPU 101 in response to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. The sub CPU 131 receives the changed start command, and the sub CPU 131 selects the effect content corresponding to the change start command, and the sub CPU 131 issues a command for instructing the overall CPU 141 and the lamp control board 150 to execute the effect. This is a time when control is executed according to the command received by the general CPU 141 and the CPU of the lamp control board 150 that are transmitted and receive this command.
Further, for example, this is a case where the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is detected. In this case, the sub CPU 131 that has detected the operation instructs the overall CPU 141 and the CPU of the lamp control board 150 to execute the effect. Is different from the above in that the main CPU is not involved.

At the beginning of the special production, the customer waiting production was not yet in progress (the game was being performed), but after the special production started, the customer waiting production start command was received, and the special production was still in progress even after 180 seconds. When shifting to the power saving mode sometimes, at the time when 180 seconds have passed, the sound output is performed at a volume reduced by 50% with respect to the above-described normal power mode, and the light emitting element used in the normal performance mode The light emission output is performed by the number of light emitting elements obtained by thinning out the number of the light sources by 70%.
In this case as well, a special effect in the power saving mode may be executed by only one of the audio output and the light emission output, and the power saving performance image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 as described above. You may do it.

  Also, at the start of the special production, the customer waiting production was not yet in progress (the game was being performed), but after the special production started, the customer waiting production start command was received, and the special production is still running even after 180 seconds. In the case of shifting to the power saving mode in such a case, the mode may be shifted to the power saving mode after completion of the special effect without shifting to the power saving mode when 180 seconds have elapsed.

The transition from the power saving mode to the normal power mode is performed when any command is received from the main CPU 101 or when an operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is detected.
Then, when shifting from the power saving mode to the normal power mode, the sub CPU 131 that has received any command transmitted from the main CPU 101 executes an effect on the central CPU 141 and the CPU of the lamp control board 150. A command to be instructed is transmitted, and the central CPU 141 and the CPU of the lamp control board 150 receive this command, whereby each CPU shifts from the power saving mode to the normal power mode.

As an example of the transition from the power saving mode to the normal power mode, a game is started during the power saving mode, and the main CPU 101 receives a game ball in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 in accordance with the winning. The sub CPU 131 receives the transmitted change start command, and the sub CPU 131 selects the effect content corresponding to the change start command. Is transmitted, and the control according to the command received by the central CPU 141 and the CPU of the lamp control board 150 that has received this command is executed.
Further, for example, when the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is detected, and when the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is detected, the sub CPU 131 that detects the operation from the general CPU 141 and the lamp control board 150. A command instructing the CPU to execute the effect is transmitted, and the main CPU is different from the above in that it is not involved.

  Since whether or not to operate this power saving mode depends on the judgment of the game hall side, switching to allow the game staff to set whether or not to operate the power saving mode on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A switch is provided, and the sub CPU 131 determines operation or non-operation of the power saving mode described above by detecting the state of the changeover switch. The place where the changeover switch is provided is not limited to this, and the changeover switch may be a physical switch or an electrical switch (for example, ON / OFF by operating the touch panel).

[Timer interrupt processing by game control board 100]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100. The game control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 16 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. . Note that the processing of the game control board 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 16 and subsequent figures is performed according to a command issued by the main CPU 101 based on a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  First, the main CPU 101 executes random number update processing for updating various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and regular symbol random numbers (step S1).

  Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining the jackpot, the jackpot, or the loss. The jackpot design random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The small hitting design random number is a random number for determining the type of two types of big hits generated when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hitting game. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that the reach is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second start port 12. The jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are incremented by “1” every time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for performing the processing of step S1, and each random number returns to “0” after reaching a preset maximum value.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 executes a switch process when a detection signal is input from each switch (step S2). This switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  Following the processing of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination, displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and shows the result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the determination symbol is executed (step S3). This special symbol process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 includes a process of executing normal symbol determination, causing the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4). This normal symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs the electric tulip process for operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing part 113 when it is determined that the second start port 12 is opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. Is executed (step S5). This electric tulip process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S5, the main CPU 101 activates the blade member 90 via the specific area opening / closing part 119 and determines the V prize opening opening / closing part when it is determined that the small symbol is won in the special symbol process of step S3. A specific area opening control process for operating the slide member 94 via 122 is executed (step S6). The specific area release control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S6, the main CPU 101 controls the big winning opening control unit 116 when it is determined that the big winning is made in step S3, or when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game. Then, a special winning opening opening control process for opening the special winning opening 13 is executed (step S7). The special winning opening opening control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S7, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S8).

  Subsequent to the process of step S8, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 information necessary to determine various commands and effect contents set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the process step before step S8. Processing is executed (step S9). By executing the process of step S9, game information relating to special symbol determination and special games is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the game information includes a change start command, a symbol determination command, an opening command, a round start command, a round end (inter-round interval) command, an ending command, and the like, which will be described later.

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the first start port switch 111 as illustrated in FIG. For the random numbers (big hit random number, big hit design random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number), a first start port switch process is executed to acquire a value at the time when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input ( Step S21). The first start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the second start port switch 112, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, small bonus symbol updated as appropriate by the process of step S1. For the random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number), a second start port switch process is performed to acquire a value at the time when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input (step S22). The second start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Then, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate switch 114, and the value at the time when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input with respect to the normal symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. The gate switch process for acquiring the above is executed (step S23). This gate switch processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

[First Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 18 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 18, following the random number update process in step S <b> 1, the main CPU 101 indicates a detection signal from the first start port switch 111 (indicating that the first start port switch 111 is “ON”). Based on whether or not an ON signal is input, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 111 is turned “ON” (step S211). Here, when it is determined that the first start port switch 111 has been turned “ON” (step S211: YES), the number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether it is less than the maximum reserved number Umax1 (in the present embodiment, “4”) of the first special symbol determination (step S212).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S212: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S213). Then, as the acquisition information used for the first special symbol determination, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are correlated and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S214 to S217), a hold command for notifying the image sound control board 140 that the first special symbol determination is held is set in the main RAM 103 (step S218).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the result of the first special symbol determination is either a big hit or a loss, and the first special symbol determination is not determined to be a small hit that generates a small hit game. Has been. For this reason, the first start port switch process does not include a step of acquiring a small hitting design random number for determining the type of the two big hits.

  Although not shown in FIG. 18, it is assumed that the illegal winning determination in the first start port switch 111 described above is executed in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred according to the detection status of the first start-up switch 111, an illegal winning error 1 command is set, and the illegal winning error 1 command is transmitted to the sub CPU 131 by the transmission process described above. .

[Second Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 19 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 19, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 (the second start port switch 112 is turned “ON” subsequent to the first start port switch process in step S <b> 21. On the basis of whether or not an ON signal indicating that the second start port switch 112 has been turned ON is determined (step S221).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the second start port switch 112 is “ON” (step S221: YES), for example, a long hit game flag, a short hit game flag, or a small hit game stored in the main RAM 103. Based on whether or not the flag is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not a special game is being played (a jackpot game is being played) (step S222).

  Here, the long win game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a long win game consisting of a plurality of long open round games that open the big winning opening 13 is long, and is set to “ON” at the start of the long win game. Is set to “OFF” at the end of the long hit game. The short win game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a short win game consisting of a plurality of short open round games that open the big winning opening 13 is short, and is set to “ON” at the start of the short win game. And set to “OFF” at the end of the short hit game. The small hit game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit game for opening the specific winning opening 19 is being executed, and is set to “ON” at the start of the small hit game, and “ OFF "is set.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the special game is not being played (during the jackpot game) (step S222: NO), is the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 being displayed? It is determined whether or not (step S223). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S223: NO), as the acquisition information used for the second special symbol determination, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number And the variation pattern random numbers are acquired, and these random numbers are associated with each other and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (steps S224 to S228).

  As described above, when the game ball wins the second starting port 12 when the special game is not being displayed and the special symbol is not being displayed, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers used for the second special symbol determination in the main game. The data is directly stored in the determination storage area of the RAM 103. This determination storage area is a storage area for storing various random numbers used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. When a game ball is won at the first starting port 11, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers used for the first special symbol determination in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103, and actually performs the first special symbol determination. When the change display of the special symbol is started, various random numbers stored in the reserved storage area are shifted to the determination storage area.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the game ball has won the second starting port 12 during the special symbol change display or during the special game, the special symbol change related to the second special symbol determination corresponding to the winning is made. When the display cannot be started immediately, the second special symbol determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 is not performed. On the other hand, when a game ball wins at the first start port 11, even if the variable symbol display related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the winning cannot be started immediately, the right of the first special symbol determination is 4 is the upper limit.

  Although not shown in FIG. 19, it is assumed that the illegal winning determination in the second start port switch 112 described above is executed in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred according to the detection status of the second start port switch 112, an illegal winning error 2 command is set, and the illegal winning error 2 command is transmitted to the sub CPU 131 by the transmission process described above. .

[Gate switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 20 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S23 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 20, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the gate switch 114 (ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 is “ON”) following the second start-up port switch process in step S22. Whether or not the gate switch 114 is turned “ON” is determined based on whether or not is input (step S231).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 has been turned “ON” (step S231: YES), the normal symbol determination suspension number T stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the determination is less than the maximum hold number Tmax (for example, “4”) (step S232).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number T is less than the maximum hold number Tmax (step S232: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number T to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S233), and is held by this process. A normal symbol random number used for normal symbol determination is acquired and stored in the main RAM 103 (step S234).

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in step S3 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 21, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 determines whether the long hit game flag, the short hit game flag, or the small hit game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON”. Whether or not a special game is being played (a jackpot game is being played) is determined (step S301). Here, if it is determined that the special game is being played (the jackpot game is being played) (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process in step S4.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the special game is not being played (during the jackpot game) (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being changed (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not various random numbers related to the second start opening winning are stored in the determination storage area of the main RAM 103 ( Step S303). Specifically, various random numbers acquired in response to the game ball winning the second start opening 12 are directly stored in the determination storage area, and various random numbers related to the second start opening winning are stored. Is stored in the determination storage area. Based on whether or not this flag is stored when various random numbers are stored in the determination storage area, various types of information stored in the determination storage area are stored. It is determined whether the random number is related to the second start opening winning or the first starting opening winning. Here, when it is determined that the random number related to the second start opening winning is stored (step S303: YES), the process proceeds to step S307 described later.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the random number related to the second start opening winning is not stored in the determination storage area (step S303: NO), the main CPU 101 stores the first special symbol determination hold number U1 stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not “1” or more (step S304). Here, when it is determined that the hold count U1 is “1” or more (step S304: YES), the hold count U1 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S305). Then, a shift process for the storage area of the main RAM 103 is executed (step S306). Specifically, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers related to the first special symbol determination stored in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 are first stored in the reserved storage area. (The oldest) is shifted to the determination storage area, and the remaining one is shifted to the determination storage area.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S306 or determines that the random number related to the second start opening winning is stored in the determination storage area (step S303: YES), it is stored in the determination storage area. The jackpot determination process is executed based on the random number that is stored (step S307). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, and setting information of a determination symbol indicating the determination result is set in the main RAM 103. When it is determined that it is a big hit (1 type big hit), the type of the big win is determined, and when it is determined that it is a small hit, the game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game. The kind of two types of jackpots that will be triggered by this is determined. The jackpot determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S307, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process (step S308). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern table stored in advance in the main ROM 102, the determination result of the jackpot determination in step S307, the type of determination symbol set in the main RAM 103, the current gaming state, the first special symbol A variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the reach random number and variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area together with the determination pending number U1 and the jackpot random number used in the processing of step S307. By performing the processing in step S308, it is also determined whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach.

  Following the processing of step S308, the main CPU 101 determines whether the symbol setting information set in step S307, the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. Information indicating whether or not, a variation pattern setting information set in the process of step S308, information indicating which of the effects with reach or effects without reach, information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, etc. A change start command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S309). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9.

  On the other hand, the effect control board 130 needs to specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the variation start command received from the game control board 100, and perform either the effect with reach or the effect without reach. To determine the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by acquiring the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed. Then, in accordance with the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, what kind of effect image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5, what kind of sound is output from the speaker 24. Is output, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 25 is determined, whether the logo accessory 7 is to be operated, and the effect of the determined content is determined by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. To run.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S309, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol variation display based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in step S309 (step S310). The special symbol variation display is performed when the processing in steps S307 to S309 is performed in a state where the random number related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area. 41. When the process of steps S307 to S309 is performed in a state where random numbers relating to the second special symbol determination are stored, the second special symbol display 42 is used.

  Subsequent to step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the customer waiting flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S311). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state, the right for the first special symbol determination is not reserved, and the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol is not held. It is set to “ON” at the timing when the special symbol variation display related to symbol determination is not performed, and is set to “OFF” when the special symbol variation display is started again.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (step S311: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the customer waiting flag to “OFF” (step S312). Then, when the process of step S312 is executed, or when it is determined that the customer waiting flag is not set to “ON” (step S311: NO), measurement of the variation time is started (step S313).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S313 or determines that the special symbol is changing (step S302: YES), the main CPU 101 is selected by the process of step S308 from the start of the measurement of the changing time in step S313. It is determined whether or not the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), a series of special symbol processing ends, and the processing proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9. Thereby, the process etc. which stop-display the decoration symbol which was variably displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 in the aspect which shows the determination result of special symbol determination, etc. are performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation display started in the process of step S310 (step S317). At that time, the determination symbol (big hit symbol, small bonus symbol, or lost symbol) set in the process of step S307 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display which has variably displayed the special symbol.

  Subsequent to the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the variation time that started the measurement in the process of step S313 (step S318), starts the first special game if it is a big win, and if it is a small win The stop process including the process of starting the small hit game is executed (step S319). This stop process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the number U1 of the first special symbol determination is not “1” or more (step S304: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the customer waiting flag is set to “ON”. (Step S321). If it is determined that the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (step S321: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process in step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the customer waiting flag is not set to “ON” (step S321: NO), the main CPU 101 sets a customer waiting command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the customer waiting state in the main RAM 103. (Step S322), the customer waiting flag is set to "ON" (Step S323). This customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9. As a result, when a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting command was transmitted, the customer waiting effect is started.

[Big hit judgment processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 22 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S307 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the random number related to the second special symbol determination is stored together with the flag in the determination storage area (step S303: YES), or when the process of step S306 is executed, it is exemplified in FIG. In this manner, the jackpot determination is executed (step S3071). Here, when executing the jackpot determination relating to the second start opening winning, the jackpot determination table relating to the first starting opening winning is executed with reference to the second starting opening winning jackpot determination table stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. When doing so, the first start opening winning jackpot determination table stored in advance in the main ROM 102 is referred to.

  In the second start opening winning jackpot determination table, a determination result and a random value are stored in association with each other. Specifically, a random value for the big hit, a random value for the small hit, and a random value for the loss are stored. When the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot determination related to the second start opening winning a prize, the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches any random value defined in the second starting opening winning jackpot determination table It is determined whether it is a big hit (one type big hit), a small hit or a loss based on whether or not.

  In the first start opening winning jackpot determination table, a determination result and a random value are stored in association with each other. Specifically, a random value for jackpot and a random value for loss are stored. When the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot determination related to the first start opening winning prize, the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches any random number value defined in the first starting opening winning jackpot determination table It is determined whether it is a big hit (1 type big hit) or lost.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 determines that the various random numbers stored in the determination storage area are satisfied when the start condition is established such that various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination are stored in the determination storage area. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not to perform the first special game.

  Based on the determination result of step S3071, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a one-type big hit (step S3072). Here, when it is determined that it is one kind of big hit (step S3072: YES), the type of big hit is determined with reference to the symbol determination table at the time of big hit stored in the main ROM 102 (step S3073).

  In the symbol determination table at the time of jackpot, the hit type and the random number value are stored in association with each other. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number stored in the determination storage area together with the jackpot random number matches a random jackpot value specified in the symbol determination table at the jackpot time. Determine the type. Examples of the type 1 big hit in the first special symbol determination include “per 7R without time reduction”, “per 8R with time reduction”, and “abrupt time reduction”, and examples of the type 1 big hit in the second special symbol determination. Examples include “per 8R without time reduction”, “per 15R with time reduction”, and “per 8R with time reduction” (see FIG. 4).

  The main CPU 101 sets the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S3073 as setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S3074). As a result, the jackpot symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and the first special game is executed. Will be.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol determination is not one type big hit (step S3072: NO), it is based on whether or not the flag related to the second special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area. Then, it is determined whether or not this special symbol determination is a first special symbol determination related to the first start opening prize (step S3075). Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is made (step S3075: YES), if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not a big hit, it is a loss, so the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 as setting information. (Step S3076). As a result, the lost symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41.

  When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is not a big hit, the determination result is a small hit or a loss. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not the first special symbol determination (step S3075: NO), that is, if the current special symbol determination is the second special symbol determination, the result of the jackpot determination in step S3071 It is determined whether or not is a small hit (step S3077). Specifically, based on whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches the random number value corresponding to the jackpot specified in the second start opening winning jackpot determination table. 2 It is determined whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is a small hit or a loss.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is not a small hit (step S3077: NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3076. In this case, the lost symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the second special symbol display 42.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (step S3077: YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. Is determined (step S3078). Specifically, the type of the small hit is determined based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit matches the random number for small hit stored in the determination storage area To do. Then, the determined small hit symbol is set in the main RAM 103 as setting information (step S3079). Thereby, the small winning symbol set here at the time of the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the second special symbol indicator 42.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 in this way, the above-described small hit game is started. Then, when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, two kinds of big wins are made, and the second special game is performed with the small hit game as the first round. The type of big hit of two types is determined based on the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42. For this reason, the process which determines the kind of small hits can be regarded as the process which determines the kind of two types big hit. Examples of the two types of big hits are “per 15R with time reduction”, “per 8R with time reduction”, and “per 8R without time reduction” (see FIG. 4).

[Processing during stop by game control board 100]
FIG. 23 is a detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S319 of FIG. After resetting the variation time by the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a type 1 big win based on the result of the big hit determination of step S3071 as illustrated in FIG. Step S3191). Here, when it is determined that it is a type 1 big hit (step S3191: YES), it is determined whether the first special game executed for the type 1 big win is a long win game or a short win game ( Step S3192). Specifically, based on the setting information, the jackpot symbol set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S3074 determines whether a long hit game or a short hit game is performed. In the present embodiment, a short win game is played only when “suddenly short win”, and a long win game is played for other types of big hits.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the game is a long game (step S3192: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the long game flag to “ON” (step S3193), and determines that the game is not a long game (step S3193). Step S3192: NO), the short winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S3194).

  Following the process of step S3193 or the process of step S3194, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the short-time game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S3195). The short-time game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the short-time game state, and is set to “ON” when the normal game state shifts to the short-time game state. It is set to “OFF” when returning to the normal gaming state from. If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (step S3195: YES), the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3196).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a one-type big hit (step S3191: NO), it determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is set to “ON” (step S3197). If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (step S3197: YES), the short-time game remaining number W stored in the main RAM 103 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step). S3198). The short game remaining number W indicates the remaining number of times that the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in the short time gaming state. When the short game residual number W becomes “0”, the game The state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S3198, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving remaining game count W is “0” (step S3199). Here, when it is determined that the short time remaining game count W is “0” (step S3199: YES), the short time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3200). As a result, the gaming state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  The main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3200, determines that the time-saving game flag is not “ON” (step S3197: NO), or determines that the time-saving game remaining count W is not “0” ( In step S3199: NO, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit like the processing in step S3077 (step S3201). If it is determined that the game is a small hit (step S3201: YES), the small hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S3202).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3196, determines that the time-saving game flag is not set to “ON” (step S3195: NO), or executes the process of step S3202, the main CPU 101 opens to the main RAM 103. A command is set (step S3203). Here, the term “opening” refers to a period from the start of a long win game or a short win game until the first big winning opening 13 is opened, or the first special winning opening 19 is opened after the small winning game is started. It means the period until it starts. On the other hand, the opening command is a command for notifying that the opening is started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9.

[Normal design processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 24 is a detailed flowchart of the normal symbol process in step S4 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 24, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” following the special symbol process in step S3 (step S401). ). This auxiliary game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the electric tulip 17 is in an auxiliary game in which the operation of returning to the closed posture after maintaining the open posture for a predetermined time is being performed a predetermined number of times, and is set to “ON” during the auxiliary game. It is set and set to “OFF” when it is not in an auxiliary game.

  If it is determined in step S401 that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S401: YES), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process in step S5.

  When determining that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S401: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 45 is being displayed (step S402). ), When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the number T of the normal symbol determination is “1” or more (step S403). Here, when it is determined that the number of holds T is not “1” or more (step S403: NO), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process of step S5.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of holds T is “1” or more (step S403: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the number of holds T to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S404), and executes a hit random number determination process. (Step S405). Specifically, the oldest normal symbol random number among the normal symbol random numbers stored in the main RAM 103 by the processing in step S234 (see FIG. 20) is the winning value related to the normal symbol determination stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win based on whether or not it matches any of the above.

  Following the process of step S405, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win based on the determination result of step S405 (step S406). In step S406: YES), a winning symbol to be stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the normal symbol display 45 is set in the main RAM 103 (step S407). On the contrary, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not successful (step S406: NO), the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 (step S408).

  Following the processing of step S407 or step S408, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state based on whether or not the time-saving gaming flag is set to “ON”. Is determined (step S409). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S409: YES), the normal symbol change time for displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45 is set to, for example, 25 seconds (step S410). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S409: NO), the normal symbol variation time is set to 2 seconds, for example (step S411). Thus, the normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S410 or step S411 is temporarily stored in the main RAM 103.

  Following the processing of step S410 or step S411, the main CPU 101 starts normal symbol variation display by the ordinary symbol display 45 (step S412), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation display (step S413). ).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol change display is being performed by the normal symbol display 45 (step S402: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to end the normal symbol change display (step S415). Specifically, whether or not to end the normal symbol variation display based on whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement was started by the process of step S413 has reached the normal symbol variation time set in step S410 or step S411. Determine whether. Here, when it is determined not to end the normal symbol variation display (step S415: NO), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process of step S5.

  When the main CPU 101 determines to end the normal symbol fluctuation display (step S415: YES), the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 45, and is set in the main RAM 103 by the process of step S407. The winning symbol or the lost symbol set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S408 is stopped and displayed (step S416). And the elapsed time which started measurement by the process of step S413 is reset (step S417). Then, similarly to the process of step S406, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is correct (step S418). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win (step S418: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S419). Thus, the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON”, whereby the auxiliary game for operating the electric tulip 17 is started.

[Electric tulip processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 25 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process in step S5 of FIG. Following the normal symbol processing in step S4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 25 (step S501). If it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S501: NO), the process proceeds to the specific area release control process in step S6.

  When determining that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S501: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the electric tulip 17 is operating (step S502). If it is determined that the electric tulip 17 is not operating (step S502: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503), as in the process of step S406. Here, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503: YES), as the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17, the operation of opening the second start port 12 for 0.1 second is performed once. The pattern is set in the main RAM 103 (step S504). On the contrary, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S503: NO), that is, when it is the short-time gaming state, the second start port 12 is set as the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 for 0.3 seconds. An operation pattern for performing the opening operation five times is set in the main RAM 103 (step S505).

  After setting the operation pattern in step S504 or step S505, the main CPU 101 causes the electric tulip opening / closing unit 113 to start the operation of the electric tulip 17 in the set operation pattern (step S506).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S506 or determines that the electric tulip 17 is operating (step S502: YES), has the operation of the electric tulip 17 started in the process of step S506 been completed? It is determined whether or not (step S507). If it is determined that the operation of the electric tulip 17 has been completed (step S507: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “OFF” (step S508). Thereby, the auxiliary game is ended.

[Specific Area Open / Close Control Processing by Game Control Board 100]
When the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed by the specific area release control process in step S6. Hereinafter, the specific area release control process executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. Here, FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 are detailed flowcharts of the specific area release control processing in step S6 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the electric tulip process in step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 (step S601). Here, if it is determined that the small hit game flag is not set to “ON” (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the big winning opening release control process of step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S601: YES), for example, the elapsed time since the opening command related to the small hit game is set in the process of step S3203. Based on whether or not has reached a preset opening time, it is determined whether or not a small hit game is being opened (step S602). If it is determined that the opening is in progress (step S602: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening release control process of step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the main CPU 101 resets the number X of winning game balls to the specific winning port 19 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S604), and opens / closes the specific area. The opening control of the specific winning opening 19 by the unit 119 is started (step S605), and the measurement of the elapsed time since the opening control is started is started (step S606). By performing the processing of step S605, the blade member 90 performs the operation of closing the specific winning opening 19 after opening it for 3.2 seconds once.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not opening in the small hit game (step S602: NO), for example, based on the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is ending. Determination is made (step S608). Here, when it is determined that the ending in the small hit game is not in progress (step S608: NO), the specific winning opening switch 118 is turned “ON” based on the presence / absence of the detection signal input from the specific winning opening switch 118. It is determined whether or not (step S609). Here, when it is determined that the specific winning opening switch 118 is “ON” (step S609: YES), it is determined that one gaming ball has won the specific winning opening 19, and the winning number X of the gaming balls is calculated. The value updated by “1” is updated (step S610).

  When the process of step S610 is executed, the main CPU 101 determines that the specific winning opening switch 118 is not “ON” (step S609: NO), or if the process of step S606 is executed, the process of step S606 is performed. It is determined whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement is started matches a preset time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (step S611). Here, when it is determined that the set time has been reached (step S611: YES), the V winning opening opening / closing unit 122 is operated to operate the slide member 94 to open the V winning opening 92 (step S612). Thereby, the above-mentioned two types of big hits can be generated.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S612 or determines that the elapsed time does not coincide with the set time (step S611: NO), based on the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the V winning opening switch 120, It is determined whether or not the V prize opening switch 120 is “ON” (step S613). Here, when it is determined that the V prize opening switch 120 has been turned “ON” (step S613: YES), the V prize flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S614). This V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball is won at the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game and two kinds of big wins are generated, and no gaming ball is won at the V winning opening 92 Is set to “OFF”, and is set to “ON” when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S614, or determines that the V winning opening switch 120 is not “ON” (step S613: NO), whether or not it is the closing timing of the V winning opening 92 Is determined (step S615). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the V winning opening 92 was opened. Here, when it is determined that it is the closing timing (step S615: YES), the V winning opening 92 is closed by the V winning opening / closing unit 122 (step S616).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S616 or determines that it is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 92 (step S615: NO), the main CPU 101 determines the blades based on the elapsed time when the measurement is started by the process of step S606. It is determined whether or not the specified opening operation of the member 90 (one operation of opening the specific winning opening 19 for 3.2 seconds in this embodiment) has been completed (step S618).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified release operation has not ended (step S618: NO), the main ball 102 stores the number X of game balls won in the specific winning opening 19 in the current small hit game in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the number of game balls Xmax (for example, “6”) that defines the closing timing of the specific winning opening 19 (step S619). Here, when it is determined that the number X of winning prizes does not coincide with the number of gaming balls Xmax (step S619: NO), the process proceeds to the big prize opening opening control process of step S7.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number X matches the number of game balls Xmax (step S619: YES), or when it is determined that the prescribed release operation has ended (step S618: YES), the process of step S605 is performed. The opening control of the started specific winning opening 19 is ended (step S620), the elapsed time at which the measurement was started in step S606 is reset (step S621), and the ending time measurement is started (step S622). Here, the ending refers to a period from the end of opening the specific winning opening 19 to the end of the small hit game.

  If the main CPU 101 determines in step S608 that ending is in progress (step S608: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 27, the ending time at which the measurement is started in step S622 is preset. It is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the ending time for the game has been reached (step S625). Here, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S625: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening release control process of step S7.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the preset ending time has elapsed (step S625: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small hit game flag to “OFF” in order to end the small hit game (step S626), and receives a V prize. It is determined whether or not the flag is set to “ON” (step S627). If it is determined that the V winning flag is not set to “ON” (step S627: NO), it is determined that the game ball has not won the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, and step S7. The process proceeds to the special prize opening opening control process. In this case, the special game ends only with the small hit game.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the V winning flag is set to “ON” (step S627: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the V winning flag to “OFF” (step S628) and follows the small hit game. In order to start the long open round game, the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S629), and the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S630).

  Although not shown in FIG. 26, it is assumed that the illegal winning determination at the specific winning opening switch 118 described above is executed in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred according to the detection status of the specific prize opening switch 118, an illegal prize error 3 command is set, and the illegal prize error 3 command is transmitted to the sub CPU 131 by the transmission process described above.

[Large winning opening opening control processing by game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening control process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S7 of FIG. Following the specific area release control process in step S6, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the long winning game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 28 (step S71). Here, when it is determined that the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S71: YES), the long winning game control process is executed (step S72). This long hit game control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the long winning game flag is not set to “ON” (step S71: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the short winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S75). . Here, when it is determined that the short hit game flag is “ON” (step S75: YES), a short hit game control process is executed (step S76). The short hit game control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the process of step S76 is executed, when the process of step S72 is executed, or when it is determined that the short hit game flag is not set to “ON” (step S75: NO), the process of step S8 Processing proceeds to award ball processing.

[Outline of opening pattern of special prize opening 13 and production during special game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the effects during the special game will be described.

  FIG. 29 (A) shows the relationship between the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the performance during the game per 8R length when a game per 8R length is played for "8R without time limit" or "per 8R with time limit". FIG. When the opening command related to the long win game of 1 type is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the opening effect is started as illustrated in FIG. Then, as the long open round game in which the grand prize opening 13 is opened for a maximum of 29 seconds is repeatedly executed with a predetermined interval time between them, an effect during the round is executed each time the long open round game is started. Is done. This in-round effect includes, for example, an effect that displays the number of times that the special game has been performed continuously from the short-time game state to the normal game state, and an effect that informs the current number of rounds. When all the long open round games are finished and the ending command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the ending effect is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses.

  FIG. 29B is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the opening pattern of the big winning opening 13 and the effect during the 15R short win game when the 15R short win game is performed with respect to “suddenly short win”. When the opening command related to the short hit game of 1 type jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the short win effect is started. In this case, a short open round game that opens the grand prize winning opening 13 for 0.2 seconds is executed 15 times at a predetermined time interval (for example, every 1 second), but the time required for the short win game is relatively short. A series of the above short win effects is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses after all short open round games are finished and an ending command is transmitted.

  FIG. 29C is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the effect during the game per 15R length when a game per 15R length is performed for “per 15R with time reduction”. When a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, from the second round, a long open round game in which the large winning opening 13 is opened long is repeatedly executed with a predetermined interval time interposed therebetween. During the game per 15R length, in addition to the in-round effect described with reference to FIG. 29A, a music effect is performed. Specifically, a music selection screen (not shown) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 in the second round (during the first long open round game after the end of the small hit game). The music selected by the player using the effect key 27 before the third round is started is continuously played during the third and subsequent rounds. That is, the music selected by the player is output from the speaker 24 and the video of the music is reproduced on the main liquid crystal display device 5. The music reproduction selected by the player in this way may be performed when the game is controlled in the short-time game state after the game is finished per 15R length.

  In this embodiment, the case where music selection is performed in the second round of the game per long game will be described. However, a configuration in which music selection can be performed at any time during the game per long game may be employed. Or you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform music selection, when the game is controlled in a short-time game state. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform a music selection during a short hit game.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment also has a feature that the number of music pieces that can be selected by the player increases every time the first music performance performance is performed. Specifically, during the game per 15R length before the first song performance performance of the new song A is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting only the default song is displayed. On the other hand, during the game per 15R length after the first song performance performance of the new song A is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting the default song or the new song A is displayed. Then, when the first song performance performance of the new song B is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting the default song, the new song A, or the new song B is displayed. If the player selects a song but the performance of the song has started, the selected song cannot be played immediately, or if the song playback is interrupted, After the production is finished, the selected music is played from the beginning.

[Game control processing per long by the game control board 100]
FIG. 30 is a detailed flowchart of the long hit game control process in step S72 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S71: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 30, for example, the opening command related to the long winning game by the process of step S3203 Based on whether or not the elapsed time from setting has reached a predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not a long hit game is being opened (step S721). Here, when it is determined that the opening is being performed (step S721: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has passed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time (step S722). ). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S722: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S722: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds Rmax of the special game, the operation pattern of the big prize control unit 116, and the like, and stores these pieces of information in the main RAM 103. (Step S723). By executing the processing of step S723, various times related to the long game such as the interval time between rounds and the next round, and the ending time after the end of the final round are also set.

  Following the processing of step S723, the main CPU 101 resets the winning number Y of the game balls to the big winning opening 13 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S724), and the long hit game also stored in the main RAM 103. The round number R in the middle is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S725). The number of rounds R is set to “0” before the start of the game per long, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S725 is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S725, the main CPU 101 starts the opening control of the special winning opening 13 by the special winning opening control unit 116 (step S726), and the opening time that is an elapsed time from the start of the release control. Measurement is started (step S727). Then, a round start command for notifying that the long open round game has started is set in the main RAM 103 (step S728).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening in the long hit game is not in progress (step S721: NO), for example, based on the information indicating the time point in the long hit game in which the current state is stored in the main RAM 103, for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the ending immediately after the end of the final round is in progress (step S729). If it is determined that ending is in progress (step S729: YES), the process proceeds to step S744 described later.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that ending in the long hit game is not in progress (step S729: NO), for example, based on information indicating the current point in the long hit game stored in the main RAM 103. Then, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval (between the round and the next round) (step S730). Here, when it is determined that it is during the interval (step S730: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval time set by the process of step S723 has elapsed since the big winning opening 13 was closed at the end of the previous round. Determination is made (step S731). If it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S731: YES), the process proceeds to step S724 because the timing for starting the next round is reached. Conversely, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S731: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the interval (step S730: NO), the main CPU 101 determines that it is in a round and determines whether or not the winning prize opening is based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the winning prize opening switch 115. It is determined whether or not the switch 115 is “ON” (step S733). Here, when it is determined that the big prize opening switch 115 is “ON” (step S733: YES), it is judged that one game ball has won the big prize opening 13, and the number Y of game balls won is calculated. The value is updated to the value obtained by adding “1” (step S734).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S728, executes the process of step S734, or determines that the big prize opening switch 115 is not “ON” (step S733: NO), the main CPU 101 It is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed from the opening start (step S735). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which measurement is started by the process of step S727 has reached a specified opening time (29 seconds in the present embodiment) stored in advance in the main ROM 102.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S735: NO), the winning number Y of the game balls in the current round stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls Ymax (for example, “9”) defining the closing timing of the special winning opening 13 coincides (step S736). If it is determined that the winning number Y does not match the gaming ball number Ymax (step S736: NO), the process proceeds to a winning ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number Y matches the number of gaming balls Ymax (step S736: YES), or when it is determined that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S735: YES), the big winning opening control unit 116 terminates the opening control of the special winning opening 13 (step S737). At this time, a round end (inter-round interval) command (not shown) is set.

  Subsequent to the process in step S737, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the game per long stored in the main RAM 103 matches the round number Rmax set in the process in step S723. (Step S738). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S738: NO), this is the elapsed time since the big winning opening 13 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next round. Measurement of the interval time is started (step S739). The interval time when the measurement is started by the process of step S739 is used for the process of step S731.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the round number R matches the round number Rmax (step S738: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S740) and resets the round number R stored in the main RAM 103. Then, an ending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S742). This ending command is a command for notifying that the final opening of the special winning opening 13 has been completed, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S742 or determines that the ending is being performed (step S729: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed (step S744). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which measurement is started by the process of step S740 has reached the set ending time set by the process of step S723. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S744: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the set ending time has elapsed (step S744: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the long hitting game (step S745). Then, in order to end the long winning game, the long winning game flag is set to “OFF” (step S746). The gaming state setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Although not shown in FIG. 30, it is assumed that the above-described illegal winning determination by the special winning opening switch 115 is executed during the special winning opening opening control in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred according to the detection status of the big prize opening switch 115, an illegal prize error 4 flag is set.

[Short hit game control processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 31 is a detailed flowchart of the short hit game control process in step S76 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the short hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S75: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 31, for example, the opening command related to the short win game is executed by the process of step S3203. Whether or not the short hit game is being opened is determined based on whether or not the elapsed time since setting has reached a predetermined opening time (step S761). Here, when it is determined that the opening is being performed (step S761: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has passed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time (step S762). ). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S762: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S762: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the number Rmax of special games, the operation pattern of the special winning prize control unit 116, and stores these pieces of information in the main RAM 103. (Step S763). By executing the process of step S723, various times related to the short hit game such as the interval time between rounds and the next round, and the ending time after the end of the final round are also set.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S763, the main CPU 101 updates the round number R in the short hit game stored in the main RAM 103 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S764). This round number R is set to “0” before the start of the short hit game, similarly to the case where the long hit game is performed, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S764 is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S764, the main CPU 101 starts the opening control of the special winning opening 13 by the special winning opening control unit 116 (step S765), and the opening time which is an elapsed time since the opening control is started. Measurement is started (step S766).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the opening in the short win game is not in progress (step S761: NO), for example, based on information indicating the time point in the short hit game in which the current state is stored in the main RAM 103, for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the ending immediately after the end of the final round is in progress (step S767). If the main CPU 101 determines that the ending in the short win game is not being performed (step S767: NO), for example, based on information indicating the time point in the short win game that the current state stored in the main RAM 103 is. Then, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval (step S768). Here, if it is determined that the interval is in progress (step S768: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval time set by the process of step S763 has elapsed since the big winning opening 13 was closed at the end of the previous round. Determination is made (step S769). If it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S769: YES), the process proceeds to step S764 because it is time to start the next round. On the other hand, when it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S769: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the interval is not in progress (step S768: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a specified opening time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 13 (step S771). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S766 has reached a specified opening time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment) stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. . Here, when it is determined that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S771: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S771: YES), the main CPU 101 causes the special winning opening control unit 116 to end the opening control of the special winning opening 13 (step S772).

  Following the process of step S772, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the short hit game stored in the main RAM 103 matches the round number Rmax set by the process of step S763. (Step S773). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S773: NO), this is the elapsed time since the big winning opening 13 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next round. Measurement of the interval time is started (step S774). The interval time when the measurement is started by the process of step S774 is used for the process of step S769.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the round number R matches the round number Rmax (step S773: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S775), and resets the round number R stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the ending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S777). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9, similarly to the ending command related to the long hit game.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S777 or determines that the ending is being performed (step S767: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed (step S779). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which measurement is started by the process of step S775 has reached the set ending time set by the process of step S763. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S779: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the set ending time has elapsed (step S779: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the short hit game (step S780). Then, in order to end the short hit game, the short hit game flag is set to “OFF” (step S781).

  Although not shown in FIG. 31, it is assumed that the above-described illegal winning determination by the special winning opening switch 115 is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 30 during the special winning opening opening control in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred according to the detection status of the big prize opening switch 115, an illegal prize error 4 command is set, and the illegal prize error 4 command is transmitted to the sub CPU 131 by the transmission process described above.

[Game state setting process by game control board 100]
FIG. 32 is a detailed flowchart of the gaming state setting process in step S745 in FIG. 30 and step S780 in FIG. This gaming state setting process is a process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the long winning game or the short winning game is ended to the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special game played this time is a long hit game based on, for example, whether the long hit game flag or the short hit game flag is set to “ON” ( Step S7451). Here, if it is determined that the game is not long hit (step S7451: NO), that is, if the short hit game flag is set to “ON”, the process proceeds to step S7452.

  In the present embodiment, since the short hit game is played only when the result of the first special symbol determination is suddenly short hit, the short time is always given after the short hit game is played. Therefore, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving game flag to “ON” in step S7452. Then, the short time remaining game count W is set to “100” (step S7453).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the game is a long winning game (step S7451: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current long winning game is a long winning game following the small hit game (step S7454). In the present embodiment, when a long hit game is performed following the small hit game, that is, when two types of big hits are made, the long hit game flag is set to “ON” by the process of step S629 (see FIG. 27). On the other hand, in the case where only the long hit game is played without playing the small hit game, that is, in the case of one type big hit, the long hit game flag is set to “ON” by the process of step S3193 (see FIG. 23). . Therefore, based on which processing step the long hit game flag is set to “ON”, it can be determined whether or not the current long hit game is a long hit game following the small hit game.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the game is not a long winning game following the small winning game (step S7454: NO), the main CPU 101 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 at the start of the long winning game. Based on the jackpot symbol, it is determined whether or not there is a short time after the end of the long hit game (step S7455). On the contrary, when it is determined that the game is a long hit game following the small hit game (step S7454: YES), the long hit is based on the small hit symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 at the start of the small hit game. It is determined whether or not there is a short time after the game ends (step S7456).

  Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result in step S7455 or step S7456 is a short time (step S7457). If it is determined that there is a short time (step S7457: YES), step S7452 and step The process of S7453 is executed. Thus, the game is controlled in the short game state when the second start port 12 is easily opened until the special symbol determination is executed 100 times after the long hit game is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no time saving (step S7457: NO), the processing of step S7452 and step S7453 is not performed, and therefore the second start port 12 is difficult to be opened after the long hit game is completed. The game is controlled in the normal game state.

  When this series of game state setting processes is completed, the process proceeds to step S746 (see FIG. 30) when the long hit game ends, and when the short hit game ends, the process proceeds to step S781 (see FIG. 31). ) Will proceed.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control board 130]
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a CTC cycle, which is a cycle for performing timer interrupt processing to be described later. And sub CPU131 repeats the random number update process which updates the production random number etc. which are used in order to determine the content of production with the predetermined period shorter than a CTC period. That is, the sub CPU 131 repeats the timer interrupt process at the CTC cycle while repeating the random number update process at a predetermined cycle while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated.

  Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130. Similar to the timer interrupt process performed on the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 33 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Note that the processing performed on the effect control board 130 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 33 and thereafter is performed according to a command issued by the sub CPU 131 based on a program stored in the sub ROM 132.

  First, when receiving a command as game information from the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 executes a command reception process (step S10). Details of this command reception process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S10, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 has been operated based on whether or not the operation information is input from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 (step S11). ). If it is determined that the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 has been operated (step S11: YES), an operation command for notifying that is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S12). By transmitting this operation command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150, processing for realizing an effect on the effect according to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is performed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines “NO” in step S11 or when the process of step S12 is executed, the sub CPU 131 executes a command transmission process (step S13). Specifically, the command set in the sub-RAM 133 by the processing of step S10 or step S12 is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. By performing this command transmission process, the image acoustic control board 140 is instructed to execute an effect by image display, audio output, etc., and the lamp control is performed by turning on various lamps or operating the logo accessory 7. Instructed to the substrate 150. The command transmission process instructs the lamp control board 150 to turn on various lamps and to perform an effect by operating the logo accessory 7.

The sub CPU 131 detects a menu operation command for displaying various menus to the overall CPU 141 by detecting an operation of the effect button 26 while the variable effect is stopped when the number of stored memories is 0 or during the customer waiting effect. Send. Receiving this command, the overall CPU 141 displays a menu screen (not shown) for displaying various menus in the entire area.
The menu displayed on the menu screen includes game history (today, 1 week, 1 month) display, game description display, reach expectation display, and music performance schedule display (the current music performance schedule can be confirmed by calendar display). , Volume adjustment display, mini game display (fortune-telling and fortune-telling), login display, and logout display. The player operates the effect button 26 and the effect key 27 to select a desired menu and browse various display contents. Can do.
Each time the sub CPU 131 detects an operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, the sub CPU 131 transmits an effect button operation command or an effect key operation command to the overall CPU 141, and the overall CPU 141 displays according to the menu display scene at that time. To switch characters or display characters.

  On this menu screen, while displaying any of game history display, game description display, reach expectation display, music performance schedule display, login display, and logout display (first menu display), Always displays the remaining time from the end of the previous music performance until the start of the next music performance production, and the player views these displays (or login operation, logout operation), etc. Even in the state, the start time of the next musical performance performance can be recognized.

On the other hand, while any one of the volume adjustment display and the mini game display (fortune-telling or fortune-telling) is displayed (second menu display), the remaining time is not counted down. The reason is that the time during which the player displays these second menus is shorter than the time during which the first menu is displayed, so that the second menu display is displayed. This is because not much time has elapsed since the time previously recognized by the player.
The remaining time display (countdown display) until the next music performance effect displayed on this menu screen is displayed in order to prompt the player to start the music performance effect together with the remaining time display of the customer waiting effect described later. This corresponds to the second remaining time notification (countdown notification).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a player code issued from an external server when the player registers in advance with a portable terminal in an external server operated in association with the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. By obtaining and entering the obtained player code into the gaming machine, the personal game history from the start of the game to the end of the game can be browsed, game points according to the game content can be added, and the player's preference It is possible to customize a combined variation effect.
The login display in the menu is an input screen display for inputting the obtained player code to the gaming machine, and the logout display is for inputting to the gaming machine that the game is to be ended when the player ends the game. Is an input screen display.
By logging in, it is possible to customize game effects, start collecting personal game histories, accumulate game points, and logout to generate information corresponding to the personal game history and game points (for example, 2 (Dimensional code) is output and this information is received by the portable terminal, so that the personal game history and game points can be viewed.

[Command reception processing by effect control board 130]
Hereinafter, the command reception process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. Here, FIGS. 34 to 36 are detailed flowcharts of the command receiving process in step S10 of FIG. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not a hold command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received (step S101). If it is determined that a hold command has been received (step S101: YES), the number of holds for the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133 is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S102). Then, a hold display command for instructing the update of the hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is held is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S103). This hold display command is transmitted to at least the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S103 or determines that the hold command has not been received (step S101: NO), it is determined whether or not the changing effect accompanying the changing display of the special symbol is being executed. Determination is made (step S104). Specifically, for example, the variation time of the special symbol is specified based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command transmitted from the game control board 100, and the variation start command is received. Based on whether or not the variation time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is not being executed (step S104: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the game control board 100 (step S105). . Here, when it is determined that the change start command has been received (step S105: YES), the change start command is analyzed (step S106).

  In the variation start command, as described above, the determination symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination processing, the setting information indicating whether the effect with reach or the effect without reach is performed, and the setting information of the variation pattern , Information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is included. Therefore, by analyzing the variation start command, the result of the special symbol determination is identified, whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach, and the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed is identified. In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified.

  When the variation start command is analyzed, the sub CPU 131 executes variation effect pattern selection processing based on the analysis result (step S107).

  Although not shown in the figure, in the sub ROM 132, at least four of a jackpot effect table, an effect table with lose reach, an effect table without lose reach, and an effect table with respect to the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol are displayed. An effect table is stored. Each of these effect tables is provided with a plurality of tables corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the game control board 100. For example, tables for 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds are provided in the effect table without losing reach, and tables for 1 minute, 1 minute 30 seconds, and 2 minutes are provided in the jackpot effect table. ing. The sub CPU 131 selects one table from the plurality of tables based on the setting information included in the change start command. For example, when the setting information includes information indicating “losing”, information indicating that “reaching-free production” is performed, and information on a variation pattern indicating that the “variation time” of the special symbol is 4 seconds, The sub CPU 131 selects the lossless reach effect table for 4 seconds.

  In the effect table, effect random numbers and effect patterns are associated with each other. The sub CPU 131 obtains the value at the time when the change start command is received for the effect random number that is updated each time the above-described random number update process is performed, and stores a number of effect patterns stored in the selected effect table. One effect pattern is selected by reading an effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in advance.

  As a result, the effect pattern (variation pattern of the decorative design, etc.) of the variation effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5, whether or not to activate the logo accessory 7, and the operation when the logo accessory 7 is activated The contents of the effect by each effect means such as the pattern, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 25, and the output pattern of the sound output from the speaker 24 regarding the variable effect are determined.

  As described above, the effect content and the start / end timing are set in the effect control board 130 based on the game information (various commands) transmitted from the game control board 100 for the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol. . On the other hand, the type of new song (music) to be reproduced in the above-mentioned music performance production, the time during which the music performance production is performed, the screen configuration of the main liquid crystal display device 5 during the music performance production or the performance announcement production, etc. It is set in the image sound control board 140 regardless of the game information. The processing in the image sound control board 140 will be described in detail later.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 sets a change effect start command for instructing start of a change effect of the effect pattern selected in the process of step S107 in the sub RAM 133 (step S108).

  This variation effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, the fluctuating effect in which the effect pattern is determined on the effect control board 130 is realized by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

  Subsequent to step S108, the sub CPU 131 updates the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133 to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S109).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (step S104: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the symbol determination command is received from the game control board 100 (step S104). 111). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step S111: NO), the process proceeds to step S11.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step S111: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets a variation effect end command for instructing the end of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol in the sub RAM 133 (step S112).

  This variation effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, the fluctuating effect started in accordance with the process of step S108 is finished, and the decorative symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S109 or determines that the change start command is not received (step S105: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes the following process related to the special game. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 35, the sub CPU 131 determines whether an opening command has been received from the game control board 100 (step S114).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the opening command has been received (step S114: YES), the sub CPU 131 analyzes the opening command (step S115). Specifically, based on information included in the opening command, a process of determining whether the opening performed this time is related to a long hit game or a short hit game is performed.

  Based on the analysis result of step S115, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the current opening is related to a long hit game (step S116). Here, when it is determined that the game pertains to a long hit game (see FIGS. 29A and 29C) (step S116: YES), an effect pattern of an opening effect performed during the opening is selected (step S117). Then, an opening effect start command for instructing execution of the opening effect of the selected effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S118).

  This opening effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S13. As a result, an opening effect including an effect of notifying that the long hit game is started and an effect of prompting a right strike are performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, an effect using the latest song performed in the music performance effect is performed as the opening effect. Specifically, for example, when the performance performance of the new song A has already been performed but the performance performance of the new song B has not yet been performed, a part of the video of the new song A reproduced in the performance performance is used. Opening performance is performed. Further, for example, when the performance performance of the new song D has already been performed but the performance performance of the new song E has not yet been performed, the opening performance using a part of the video of the new song D reproduced in the performance performance of the song is performed. Done.

  In this way, since the opening effect is configured based on the video of the new song played in the music performance effect performed independently of the normal performance, the player can perform the opening effect every time the first music performance effect is performed. You can enjoy watching the content change. The processing performed by the image sound control board 140 in order to realize such a change in opening effect will be described in detail later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the current opening does not relate to the long win game (step S116: NO), that is, relates to the short win game (see FIG. 29B), An effect pattern of a short win effect performed between the opening and the end of the ending is selected (step S119), and a short hit effect start command for instructing execution of the short hit effect of the selected effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S119). S120).

  The short hit effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process in step S13, and a short hit effect including an effect for prompting a right-handed strike is performed.

  As for the short win effect, as with the long hit game opening effect, each time the first music performance effect is performed, the effect is switched so as to use the video corresponding to the latest song, in order to realize this The processing performed on the image sound control board 140 will also be described in detail later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the opening command has not been received (step S114: NO), when the process of step S118 is executed, or when the process of step S120 is executed, the game control is performed at the start of the long open round game. It is determined whether or not a round start command transmitted from the substrate 100 has been received (step S122).

When determining that the round start command has not been received (step S122: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether a round end command has been received (step S122-1).
When it is determined that a round end command has been received (step S122-1: YES), an in-round effect end command is set (step S122-2).
On the other hand, if it is determined that a round start command has been received (step S122: YES), the received round start command is analyzed (step S123), and the current long-open round game is a game per 15R length based on the analysis result. It is determined whether or not it is the first long open round game (2R in FIG. 29C) (step S124).

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that it is the first long open round game (step S124: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets a music selection screen display command for instructing the image sound control board 140 to display a music selection screen in the sub RAM 133. (Step S125). Here, the music selection screen is a screen that displays the music to be played during the period from the start of the 3R of the long hit game to the start of the ending effect, and the player operates the effect key 27. Thus, a desired new song can be selected. The music selection screen display command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13, and thereby the music selection screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S125 or determines that it is not the first long open round game (step S124: NO), the round start command received this time is the next long open round game (FIG. 29). It is determined whether or not to notify the start of 3R) in (C) (step S126). Here, when it is determined that the round start command notifies the start of the next long open round game (step S126: YES), the player operates the effect key 27 during the first long open round game. A music playback command for instructing to start playback of the selected music is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S127).

  This music reproduction command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, the music selected by the player is played from the third round of the game per 15R length.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S127 or determines that it is not the next long open round game (step S126: NO), the number of continuations of the special game (number of consecutive changs) or the round start command received this time The number of rounds corresponding to is determined and an effect pattern during the round is selected (step S128), and an in-round effect start command for instructing the image sound control board 140 to execute the effect during the round of the selected effect pattern is sent to the sub-RAM 133. Set (step S129). As a result, the display indicating the current number of rounds displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is updated.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the round end command has not been received (step S122-1: NO), when the process of step S122-2 is executed, or when the process of step S129 is executed, As illustrated by 36, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the game control board 100 (step S131). Here, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (step S131: YES), the received ending command is analyzed (step S132), and it is determined whether or not the ending is related to the end of the long hit game ( Step S133). Here, when it is determined that the game pertains to a long hit game (step S133: YES), an effect pattern for the ending effect is selected (step S134), and an ending for instructing execution of the ending effect of the selected effect pattern. An effect start command is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S135).

  This ending effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thus, as will be described in detail later, an ending effect using the same music image as the music used in the opening effect is performed.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the ending is not related to the long hit game (step S133: NO), that is, if the ending is related to the short hit game, the short CPU started in accordance with the process of step S120 above. A short hit effect end command for instructing the end of the hit effect is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S136).

  This short win effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. As a result, the short win effect ends after the ending time has elapsed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that an ending command has not been received (step S131: NO), when the process of step S135 is executed, or when the process of step S136 is executed, a waiting-for-customer command is issued from the game control board 100. It is determined whether or not it has been received (step S138). Here, when it is determined that the customer waiting command has been received (step S138: YES), the measurement of the elapsed time since reception of the customer waiting command is started (step S139), and the measurement flag stored in the sub RAM 133 is received. Is set to “ON” (step S140). This measurement flag is a flag indicating whether or not the elapsed time since reception of the customer waiting command is being measured.

  When it is determined that the customer waiting command has not been received (step S138: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the measurement flag is set to “ON” (step S141). Here, when it is determined that the measurement flag is not set to “ON” (step S141: NO), a series of command reception processing ends, and the processing proceeds to step S11.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the measurement flag is set to “ON” (step S141: YES), or when the process of step S140 is executed, the customer waiting determination time for defining the start timing of the customer waiting effect is determined. It is determined whether or not the time has elapsed (step S142). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time when measurement is started in the process of step S139 has reached a customer waiting determination time (for example, 30 seconds) stored in the sub ROM 132. If it is determined that the customer waiting determination time has not elapsed (step S142: NO), the process proceeds to step S11.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the customer waiting determination time has elapsed (step S142: YES), the measurement flag is set to “OFF” (step S143), the elapsed time is reset (step S144), and the customer waiting effect is displayed. A customer waiting effect start command for instructing the start is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S145).

  This customer waiting effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, a predetermined demonstration screen display waiting for the customer is started.

  In the command reception process of FIGS. 34 to 36, although not shown, when any one of the above-described illegal prize error 1 command to illegal prize error 4 command is received, each illegal prize is received. Corresponding to the error command, the illegal prize display 1 command, the illegal prize display 2 command, the illegal prize display 3 command, or the illegal prize display 4 command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process. Further, an error light emission command is transmitted to the lamp control board 150, and the CPU of the lamp control board 150 that has received this error light emission command executes error light emission control according to this command.

[Configuration Example of Control ROM 144]
FIG. 37 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the control ROM 144. As shown in FIG. 37, in addition to the program executed by the overall CPU 141, the control ROM 144 stores a performance management table, a music performance performance order management table, a display list creation table, and a priority management table. .

  The performance management table is a table that defines the date and time for each new song to be shifted to a state in which execution of the first performance performance of the new song is permitted. The performance management table will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  The music performance performance order management table is a table that is referred to in order to perform the music performance performance while switching the music every hour after completion of the music performance performance of all new songs performed weekly. The music performance performance order management table will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. In the following description, the state in which this music performance performance order management table is used is referred to as “all songs open state”.

  The display list creation table is an effect pattern table used for processing to determine an effect pattern of effects to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6. The process of determining the effect pattern here determines what kind of image data is actually used to realize the effect when the effect of the effect content determined on the effect control board 130 is executed. It is processing.

  The display list creation table is a table used to create a display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. The display list creation table is mainly used for normal effects performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6. It is referred to to control the announcement effect performed using. In this embodiment, the display list creation table is a default table, a new song A main table, a new song B main table, a new song C main table, a new song D main table, a new song E main table, a new song F main table, a new song G main table, A new song H main table, a new song I main table, a new song J main table, a new song K main table, a new song L main table, and a dot effect table.

  The default table is a table used before the initial performance performance of the new song A is performed. The new song A main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song B is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song A is performed. The new song B main table is a table that is used after the first song performance effect of the new song B is performed until the first song performance effect of the new song C is performed. The new song C main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song D is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song C is performed. The new song E main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song F is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song E is performed. The new song F main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song G is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song F is performed. The new song G main table is a table that is used until the first song performance effect of the new song H is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song G is performed. The new song H main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song I is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song H is performed. The new song I main table is a table that is used from when the first song performance effect of the new song I is performed until the first song performance effect of the new song J is performed. The new song J main table is a table that is used until the first song performance effect of the new song K is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song J is performed. The new song K main table is a table that is used after the first song performance effect of the new song K is performed until the first song performance effect of the new song L is performed. The new song L main table is a table used for one week from when the first song performance performance of the new song L is performed until all songs are released. Thus, the new song A main table to the new song L main table are tables that are used for a predetermined week. In the all-music release state, a normal performance is performed while switching these display list creation tables every hour.

  The dot effect table is a table used when performing a normal effect in dot display in the lower area A2. In other words, the dot effect table is a table used during a performance announcement effect or a music performance effect.

  The overall CPU 141 creates a display list using any of the 14 tables constituting the performance management table and the display list creation table before all songs are released. Then, in a state where all songs are released, a display list is created using either the music performance performance order management table or the 14 tables. A method for creating such a display list will be described in detail later.

The priority management table shown in FIG. 37 sets priorities for various effects (or various displays) executed in the special effect mode (mode in which the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is executed). By giving priority to the performance (or display) with the highest priority over other performances or notifications, it is optimal for the player (in some cases, the game hall staff) at that time. It is a table used in order to preferentially execute a possible presentation (or display).
The priority management table includes an image output control process described later with reference to FIG. 71, an audio output control process described later with reference to FIG. 72, a light emission control process of various light emitting elements by the CPU of the lamp control board 150, and an operation control of a logo accessory. Used in processing.
Since the CPU of the lamp control board 150 is not directly connected to the overall CPU 141, the sub CPU 131 that transmits the data indicating the priority through the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 and receives the data indicating the priority is used. The data indicating the priority is transmitted to the CPU of the lamp control board 150 by a data transmission process different from the command transmission process in step S13.

This priority management table is composed of eight layers from the first layer, which is the lowest layer with the lowest priority, to the eighth layer, which is the highest layer with the highest priority. It is a table in which effects or displays belonging to each layer are defined in association with each other.
Basically, the priority is defined based on an effect or display that the player (in some cases, a game hall staff member) is most interested in at that time.

  Here, the priority output processing of an image based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer defined in the priority management table will be described. As an image output control process executed based on the priority management table, there is an image output control pattern shown below. This process corresponds to priority determination means.

  First, in the case where the time for displaying an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to one layer and an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, An image output control pattern 1 for performing image output control only on an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to a layer having the highest priority.

  Next, in the case where the time for displaying the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, An image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the highest priority layer is displayed prominently when viewed from the player (in some cases, a game hall staff), and an effect belonging to a layer other than the highest priority layer An image output control pattern 2 for performing image output control on the image relating to (or display) with a simplified image using a dot image.

  And when the time which displays the image concerning the production (or display) belonging to one layer and the image concerning the production (or display) belonging to the other (one or more) layers overlaps, An image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the layer with the highest priority is displayed conspicuously when viewed from the player (in some cases a game hall staff), and an effect belonging to a layer other than the layer with the highest priority ( Or an output control pattern 3 for performing output control with a reduced image or a simplified image by displaying only a minimum image.

Therefore, in the case where an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to one layer and an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, each selected layer By comparing the priorities of the images, the image related to the production (or display) belonging to the layer with the highest priority among them is displayed conspicuously from the player, while belonging to the layer with the lower priority There are cases where the image related to the effect (or display) is not displayed at all (image output control pattern 1), and the case where the image is displayed as a simplified image (image output control patterns 2 and 3).
The simplified image by the dot image and the simplified image by displaying only the reduced image or the minimum image correspond to the second mode, and modes other than the second mode correspond to the first mode.

The priority management table shown in FIG. 37 includes the effects (or display) contents belonging to the first layer,
[1] Customer waiting effect [2] There is a variable effect stop display when the number of reserved memories is 0, and both the image related to [1] and the image related to [2] are basically effects belonging to the upper layer (Or display) is set to a non-display state (image output control pattern 1). However, when the image related to [2] overlaps with an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to a fourth layer (special effect) described later, it is displayed as a simplified image as a dot image in the lower area A2 ( Image output control pattern 2). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the second layer,
[1] There is a menu screen display in the normal effect mode, and an image (control pattern 1) that is in a non-display state by an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the higher layer is an effect (or a fourth layer described later) (or The menu screen image in the case where it overlaps with the image related to (display) (special effect image) may be a higher layer than the image related to effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer (special effect image) under a predetermined condition. is there. This case will be described later.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the third layer,
[1] Fluctuation effect that starts changing after the start of the special effect, and display of the number of reserved memories at that time [2] There is an effect during the round that does not include the promotion effect during the jackpot game, and the image related to [1] will be described later When the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer to be overlapped is displayed as a simplified image as a dot image in the lower area A2 (image output control pattern 2). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.
When the image related to [2] overlaps with the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer described later, it is a simplified image with an image of the minimum information (round number image). Displayed (image output control pattern 3). At this time, the image output control pattern 1 may be adopted.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the fourth layer,
[1] Performance announcement effect [2] There is a music performance effect, and the image according to [1] and the image according to [2] are basically displayed in the upper area A1. However, when it overlaps with an image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fifth layer, which will be described later, the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fifth layer is hidden (image output control pattern 1).
Further, when the image overlaps with an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the sixth layer described later, it is displayed as a simplified image as a reduced image (image output control pattern 3).
In the present embodiment, special effect images (performance announcement effect images and music performance effect images) relating to special effects (performance announcement effects and music performance effects) that are effects during these special effect modes are executed during the special effect mode. Even in the production, the priority is not always set at the highest level.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the fifth layer,
[1] The menu screen display during the special effect mode and when the variable effect is stopped. Even in the same menu screen display, as described above, the normal effect mode is set to the lower second layer while the special effect mode. In the case where the mode is in progress and the change is stopped (the number of stored memories is 0), since it is set to a higher layer than the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer, When the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer overlaps with the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fifth layer, the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer ( The special effect image) is not displayed (image output control pattern 1). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the sixth layer,
[1] Opening effect during jackpot game [2] Round effect including promotion effect during jackpot game [3] Fluctuation effect that has started to fluctuate before the start of special effect + Hold memory number display, The image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the image is executed only with the image (special effect) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer among the images related to the effect (or display) belonging to the lower layer. Time may overlap.
In this case, when the image related to [1] and the image related to [2] overlap, the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer is displayed as a simplified image as a reduced image. (Image output control pattern 3).
In addition, when an image related to [3] overlaps, or when a later-described partition is set for the image related to [3], an image (special effect) related to an effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer after the partition ) Is displayed as a simplified image as a reduced image (image output control pattern 3). On the other hand, if no delimiter is set, the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer until the image display according to [3] is completed. ) Related images (special effects) are not displayed (image output control pattern 1).
The effect (or display) belonging to the sixth layer corresponds to the second effect.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the seventh layer,
[1] Jackpot confirmation effect [2] Jackpot end display in ending effect during jackpot game [3] CI display in ending effect during jackpot game [4] Card return promotion display in ending effect during jackpot game The image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the seventh layer is only executed with the image (special effect) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer among the images related to the effect (or display) belonging to the lower layer. May overlap.
In this case, an image (special effect) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer
Is not displayed until the image display related to the effect (or display) belonging to the seventh layer is completed (image output control pattern 1). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.
The effect (or display) belonging to the seventh layer corresponds to the second effect.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the eighth layer,
[1] There are various error indications due to radio wave detection, magnetic detection, fraudulent winning, etc., and all the images related to the effect (or display) belonging to the eighth layer have the highest priority in the layer, and the effect belonging to the lower layer (or The image related to (display) is not displayed until the image display related to the effect (or display) belonging to the eighth layer ends (image output control pattern 1). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.
Thus, since the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the eighth layer is an image related to various error displays, it belongs to the highest layer.

  In addition to the method of displaying the dot image, the reduced image, or the minimum information image as the simplified image, for example, a part of the game effect image displayed during the normal effect mode (for example, the background image) Alternatively, an image (for example, only the decorative pattern P12) thinned out may be displayed as a simplified image.

[Timer interrupt processing by image sound control board 140]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interruption processing executed in the image sound control board 140. The image acoustic control board 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 38 at regular intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. To do.

  First, the overall CPU 141 executes an RTC information acquisition process of acquiring RTC information from the RTC 134 of the effect control board 130 and storing it in the control RAM 145 (step S2000). The RTC information stored in the control RAM 145 is rewritten with the newly acquired RTC information every time the process of step S2000 is performed.

  Subsequent to the process in step S2000, the overall CPU 141 executes a measurement process for measuring an elapsed time since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (step S2100). The overall CPU 141 starts the performance notification effect and the music performance effect based on the measurement result of step S2100. This measurement process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2100, the overall CPU 141 executes a state control process for determining whether or not the execution of the initial music performance effect of each new song is permitted (step S2200). This state control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2200, the overall CPU 141 executes a notification effect control process for controlling the notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (step S2300). The notification effect control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2300, the overall CPU 141 executes a performance notification effect control process for controlling the performance notification effect performed prior to the music performance effect using the main liquid crystal display device 5 (step S2400). This performance announcement effect control process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 45 and FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2400, the overall CPU 141 executes a music performance effect start process for starting a music performance effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 (step S2500). This music performance effect start processing is performed separately from the game information from the game control board 100 on the main liquid crystal display device 5 that is executing the normal effect (the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol and the hit effect accompanying the special game). This is a process for starting the above-mentioned music performance effect based on the information stored in advance in the control ROM 144. The music performance production start process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process in step S2500, the overall CPU 141 executes a normal effect control process for controlling a normal effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 (step S2600). This normal effect control process is a process for causing the main liquid crystal display device 5 to execute the normal effect in accordance with the game controlled by the game control board 100 based on the game information from the game control board 100. The normal effect control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2600, the overall CPU 141 executes a music performance effect end process for ending the music performance effect started in response to the music performance effect start process of step S2500 (step S2700). This music performance effect end processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the processing in step S2700, the overall CPU 141 creates a main liquid crystal display list and / or a sub liquid crystal display list based on the results of the processing in steps S2300 to S2700, and sets them in the display list storage area 1491. Image output control processing is executed (step S2800). The image output control process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2800, the overall CPU 141 performs audio output control processing for outputting music, audio, and the like from the speaker 24 so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Execute (step S2900). This audio output control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to step S2900, the overall CPU 141 executes data transmission control processing (step S3000). Specifically, data related to image sound control performed on the image sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. Thereby, the frame lamp 25 and the logo accessory 7 are controlled so as to synchronize with the effects performed by the main liquid crystal display device 5, the sub liquid crystal display device 6, and the speaker 24.

[Measurement process by image acoustic control board 140]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the measurement process in step S2100 of FIG. This measurement process corresponds to time determination means.
Subsequent to the RTC information acquisition processing in step S2000, the overall CPU 141 adds “1” to the interrupt processing count N in the image acoustic control board 140 stored in the control RAM 145 as illustrated in FIG. Update (step S2101). Every time an interrupt process is performed on the image sound control board 140, the process of step S2101 is performed, whereby the elapsed time since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is measured.

  Subsequent to step S2101, the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the start time of the performance announcement effect (step S2102). Specifically, in this embodiment, the first set time for determining whether or not a predetermined time before the start time of the music performance effect (1 minute before in this embodiment) is set to 59 minutes. Therefore, the elapsed time is calculated by multiplying the interrupt processing time interval (33 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in the image sound control board 140 by the interrupt processing count N stored in the control RAM 145 to calculate the elapsed time. It is determined whether or not it is the start time of the performance announcement effect based on whether or not has reached 59 minutes.

  Here, the start time of the performance announcement effect is not necessarily the time at which the performance announcement effect is started, but is the time to permit the start of the performance announcement effect. That is, the performance announcement effect may be started immediately when the start time is reached, or may be started after 40 seconds elapses from the start time, depending on the execution state of the normal effect. Also, depending on the execution status of the normal performance, the performance announcement performance may not be performed. The performance announcement effect control process for controlling such a performance announcement effect will be described in detail later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start time of the performance announcement effect (step S2102: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the performance notification flag stored in the control RAM 145 to “ON” (step S2103). This performance notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not the start time of the performance announcement effect has been reached, and is set to “ON” when the start time of the performance notification effect is reached, and “OFF” when the music performance effect is started. Set to

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2103 or determines that it is not the start time of the performance announcement effect (step S2102: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the start time of the music performance effect (step S2104). ). Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the second set time for determining whether or not it is the start time of the music performance effect is set to 1 hour, the same method as the process of step S2102 is performed. Based on whether or not the calculated elapsed time has reached 1 hour, it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the musical performance performance. Here, when it is determined that it is not the start time of the music performance effect (step S2104: NO), the process proceeds to the state control process of step S2200.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start time of the music performance effect (step S2104: YES), it sets the music performance flag stored in the control RAM 145 to “ON” (step S2105). Here, the music performance flag is a flag indicating whether or not the music performance production start time has come, and is set to “ON” when the music performance production start time is reached, and “OFF” when the music performance production is started. "Is set.

  In this way, the overall CPU 141 has a second set time (1 hour in this embodiment) that defines the elapsed time during measurement and the start timing of the music performance effect, regardless of the various commands transmitted from the game control board 100. The start timing of the performance of the music performance is determined based on whether or not the music performance has been set, and the performance performance effect is started on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 by setting the music performance flag to “ON” at the determined start timing. Let The music performance production start control process for starting the music performance production will be described in detail later.

  Subsequent to step S2105, the overall CPU 141 resets the interrupt processing count N stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2106). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the elapsed time measured by repeating the processing of step S2101 reaches 1 hour, the elapsed time is measured again after the interrupt processing count N is returned to “0”. . For this reason, a musical performance performance is performed every hour.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the second set time is set to 1 hour has been described, but the second set time may be a time other than 1 hour. Further, the second setting time is not necessarily one, and for example, different second setting times may be set according to the type of new song used for the music performance performance. By adopting this configuration, the time interval at which the music performance performance is performed can be made different for each new song. Also, the first set time may be a time other than 59 minutes.

  Subsequent to step S2106, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not all songs are released (step S2107). Specifically, all songs will be released on February 22, 2014, one week after February 15, 2014 (see FIG. 40), when the first song performance of the new song L, which will be the last performance of the song, will be performed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the current date indicated by the RTC information acquired from the RTC 134 is a date after February 22, which is the start date of the transition to the all songs release state. Here, when it is determined that the state is not the all-music release state (step S2107: NO), the process proceeds to the state control process of step S2200.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are released (step S2107: YES), the overall CPU 141 updates the reset processing count P stored in the control RAM 145 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S2108). The reset processing count P indicates the number of times the reset processing in step S2106 has been performed. In the present embodiment, since the process of step S2106 is performed every time one hour has elapsed with respect to the time when the power is turned on, the reset process count P is equal to the pachinko machine at the timing when the reset process count P is updated. 1 is the same as the elapsed time from the power-on. For this reason, for example, if the reset processing count P is “1”, it can be determined that one hour has elapsed since the power was turned on, and if it is “2”, it can be determined that two hours have elapsed. . The number P of reset processes is used in the music performance effect start process in step S2500 in order to determine the type of new music used for the music performance effect that starts every hour in the state where all songs are released.

[Performance management table]
FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the performance management table. As illustrated in FIG. 40, the performance management table includes a new song type indicating the type of new song, a first song performance production date that is a date for performing the first song performance production, and a new song corresponding to the first song performance production date. Are stored in association with each new song, which is the time at which the first song performance effect is permitted to be executed.

  For example, for the new song A, at 12:00 (noon) on November 30, 2013, the internal state related to the music performance production is shifted to the music performance production permission state, and then the first music performance production of the new song A is started. Is stipulated. Also, for example, for new song B, at 12 o'clock (noon) on December 7, 2013, the internal state related to the song performance production is shifted to the song performance production permission state, and then the first song performance production of the new song B is started. It is stipulated that In the present embodiment, the music performance flag is set to “ON” every hour based on the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the performance performance permission state of the new music A is on November 30, 2013 For 1 week from 12 o'clock to 12 o'clock on December 7 in the same year, when the performance performance of new song B is permitted, the performance performance of new song A will be repeated every hour on the basis of power-on. . This is the same for the new songs B to L, except that the periods in which the music performance effect is permitted differ.

  Note that the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment uses the normal liquid crystal display device 5 performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 6 when the first music performance performance is performed. It has the feature that the production contents of the announcement production to be performed change.

  For example, when the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, the content of the performance of each performance changes as follows. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 40, as the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5, only the default background image appeared until the initial performance performance of the new song A was performed. After the first music performance effect is performed, a new song A background image created using image data related to the new song A appears. The same applies to new songs after the new song B.

  Also, in the opening of the long hit game, the default opening production was performed until the first song performance production of the new song A. The first song performance of the new song B after the first song performance production of the new song A was performed. Until the performance performance is performed, an opening performance using image data and sound data related to the new song A is performed. The same applies to the ending effect of the long hit game. In this way, the opening effect and the ending effect in the long hit game are fixed to those based on the new song used for the current music performance effect until the first music performance effect of the next new song to be performed is performed. . That is, for example, after the first music performance effect of the new song C is performed until the first music performance effect of the new song D is performed, the opening effect and the ending effect of the new song C specification are performed.

  In addition, in the selection of the music to be played in the 15R long game, only the default music can be selected until the first music performance performance of the new music A, but the first music performance performance of the new music A is performed. After that, the new song A can be selected. The same applies to new songs after the new song B, and every time the first song performance effect is performed, new songs that can be selected by the player in the song selection increase. For this reason, for example, the first song performance of the new song L is that only three songs, the default song, the new song A, and the new song B, can be selected for one week after the first song performance performance of the new song B is performed. After the performance is performed, it is possible to select a default song and 13 songs including the new songs A to L.

  In addition, the performance announcement announcement was not performed until the start of the first song performance production of the new song A, but the document video of the new song A is played immediately before the start of the first song performance production of the new song B. The performance announcement effect to be performed is executed prior to the performance of the music performance every time the performance performance of the new song A is performed. The same applies to the new songs after the new song G. When the performance of the music performance is performed, the performance announcement effect corresponding to the new music used for the performance of the music performance is performed.

  In addition, the performance of the new song A is performed every other hour for one week after the first performance of the new song A is performed, and the performance of the new song B is performed when one week elapses. For this reason, during the period from when the first song performance effect of the new song A is performed until the first song performance effect of the new song B is performed, the sub liquid crystal display device 6 performs a notice effect related to the song performance effect of the new song A (for example, FIG. 9). (See (C)), or a notification effect (see FIG. 9D) regarding the performance of the new song B is performed. The same applies to new songs after the new song C.

  Up to this point, how the production changes with the first music performance production has been briefly described. However, in the present embodiment, the change in the production is a display list creation table (used to create a display list) ( This is realized by switching (see FIG. 37).

  In the present embodiment, a case is described in which the intervals from the first performance performance date to the first new performance performance date of the next new song are all set to one week, but this interval is an interval other than one week. Alternatively, a plurality of types of intervals may be set. Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where the first music performance production permission time is unified about 12:00 regarding all the new music, you may set different first music performance performance permission time for every new music. Further, the order of the performance of the new music may be the order of performance other than the order of the performance of the music illustrated in the performance management table.

  On November 30, 2013, the musical performance performance (new song A) is in a musical performance performance permission state, and on December 7, 2013, the musical performance performance (new song B) is in a musical performance performance permission state. In addition, since the contents of the special performance differ depending on the week, it is difficult to get the player bored.

[State Control Processing by Image Sound Control Board 140]
FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the state control process in step S2200 of FIG. Subsequent to the measurement process in step S2100, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not all songs are in the open state, similar to the process in step S2107 (step S2201). Here, if it is determined that all songs are in an open state (step S2201: YES), the process proceeds to the notification effect control process in step S2300.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are not open (step S2201: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the current date is the first performance performance date (step S2202). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current date indicated by the RTC information coincides with any of the initial performance performance dates of the new songs A to L defined in the performance management table. If it is determined that the date is not the first music performance effect date (step S2202: NO), that is, if it is not the first music performance effect date of any new song, the process proceeds to the notification effect control process in step S2300.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the first music performance effect date (step S2202: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the current time is the first music performance effect permitted time (step S2203). Specifically, the first musical performance performance permission time corresponding to the current date corresponding to the first musical performance performance date of any new song is read from the performance management table, and the current time indicated by the RTC information is read. It is determined whether or not the production permission time has come. In the present embodiment, since the first music performance performance permission time is set to 12:00 for all new songs, it is determined in this step S2203 whether or not the time indicated by the RTC information has reached 12:00. It will be. In step S2203, when it is determined that the first music performance performance permission time has not come (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to the notification performance control process in step S2300.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the first musical performance performance permission time has come (step S2203: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the musical performance performance permission flag stored in the control RAM 145 to “ON” (step S2204). This music performance directing permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not the music performance directing permission state is set to permit execution of the first music performance directing of the new music to be performed next to the new music currently being performed. It is set to “ON” when the first music performance production permission time of any of the first music performance production dates specified in the table is reached, and “OFF” when the music performance production is started with “ON” set. "Is set.

[Music performance performance permission status]
FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a musical performance performance permission state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the elapsed time is measured with reference to the time when the power is turned on. Therefore, assuming that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on around 8:00 am and the pachinko hall opens at 10:00 am, for example, the first song performance production date for the first song performance of the new song A is July 7th. In step S2106 (see FIG. 39), the number of times the reset process is performed is counted, and the first song performance of the new song A is triggered when the counted number reaches “4” (4 hours have passed since the power was turned on). By adopting a configuration in which the production is started, it is possible to perform the first musical performance performance of the new song A around 12:00 (noon) (see FIG. 42A).

  However, this configuration causes the following problems. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 42B, when the hall clerk turns on the power at around 5 am, the first song of the new song A at around 9 am before 10 am when the pachinko hall opens. As a result, there is a problem that the player cannot enjoy the first music performance performance of the new song A, which is a trigger for newly appearing various effects related to the new song A. In addition, the same problem may occur when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is still turned on from the day before the first performance performance date.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the music performance effect permission flag is set to “ON” on condition that the current time indicated by the RTC information is a preset time (first music performance effect permission time), and the music performance effect is set. On the condition that the music performance flag is set to “ON” while the permission flag is set to “ON”, the first performance performance is performed, while the music performance flag is set to “OFF”. When “ON” is set to “ON”, the first music performance effect is not executed (if there is a new song that has already been performed, the music performance effect of the new song is executed).

  With this configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 42C, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on at around 5 am, which is different from the assumption, around 12:00 (exactly after 12:00) When the music performance flag is “ON” for the first time, the first music performance effect of the new music A can be started. In addition, control of such a music performance directing permission state is performed similarly about new music other than the new music A.

[Music performance stage management table]
FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for describing a music performance performance order management table. The music performance performance order management table is a table for managing the type of new music used for the music performance performance in the open state of all music. In the music performance performance order management table, as illustrated in FIG. 43, the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the music performance performance with respect to each date after 2/22, which is the first day in the state where all songs are released. Is associated with the type of new song used. In the present embodiment, a case where the music performance presentation order management table is configured assuming that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on around 8:00 am will be described as an example.

  When all songs are released, the period during which the performance of each song is performed is shortened from one week to one hour. As a result, the performance performances of the new songs A to L performed over 84 days (= 1 week × 12 songs) before the entire song is released are performed in one day.

  For example, if the power is turned on at around 8 am on February 22, the performance of the new song A will be performed at about 10 am 2 hours later, and the new song B will be produced at 11 am 3 hours later. A musical performance performance is performed, and a musical performance performance of the new song C is performed around 12:00 four hours later. Then, the performance of the new song J will be performed at around 19:00, 11 hours later, the performance of the new song K will be performed at around 20:00, 12 hours later, and the song of the new song L will be performed at 21:00, 13 hours later. Performance performance will be performed.

  By the way, after February 23, if the performance of the music performance is performed on the same schedule as February 22, no matter what day the player plays, the game continues from the opening to closing of the pachinko hall. If so, you can enjoy the performance performance of all new songs. However, some players can only play during a specific time period. On the other hand, if you perform music performances with the same schedule as described above, even if you continue to play every day, The problem arises that it is not possible to enjoy the performance performance of all new songs. For example, on February 22, if a player starts playing at about 18:00, he can enjoy the performances of the new songs I to L, but cannot enjoy the performances of the new songs A to H. .

  For this reason, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 43, the song order of the new song is defined in advance so that the song order of the new song used for the performance of the song is regularly shifted one by one. Yes. For this reason, for example, the performance performance of the new song A and the new song B, which could only be enjoyed in the morning of February 22, will be performed after 18:00 on February 24. For this reason, even a player who can play only during a specific time period as described above can enjoy the performance performance of all new songs by continuing to go to the pachinko hall to some extent. The control of the music performance effect in such a state where all songs are released will be described in detail later based on FIG.

As described above with reference to FIG. 43, when the entire song is released on 2/22, the new song performed in the song performance production is changed every time based on the song performance production order management table. . Therefore, the special performance is changed every time.
In addition, in the music performance production order management table, the content of the new song is changed every time the performance of the music performance production is performed, but this is not limiting, for example, 2/22 performs the music performance production of the new song A every time, On 2/23, the performance performance of the new song B is performed every time, and the content of the performance of the performance performance may be changed daily. In addition, in 2/22, a new song A flows every time during the performance of the music performance, but the image of the new music A is changed only in a part of the performance performance of the music performance such as A-1, A-2. May be. Further, although the new song is changed every time, the image of the new song A may be displayed every time.

  Also, on 2/22, the first music performance production starts with the new song A, and the last music performance production ends with the new music L. On 2/23, the first music performance production starts with the new music B, and the last music performance production. Even if all songs are released, such as ending with a new song A, the contents (schedule) of special effects differ depending on the date, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  In addition, when all songs are released, the next performance announcement performance is performed for 5 seconds as part of the performance performance after the performance performance is finished and then the next performance performance (1 hour later) is announced. Become so. Therefore, the player can recognize the contents of the performance of the next music performance effect after the end of the current music performance effect.

[Notification effect control processing by image sound control board 140]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the notification effect control process in step S2300 of FIG. The notification effect control process is a process for controlling the notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  Subsequent to the state control process in step S2200, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not all songs are released as in the process in step S2107 as illustrated in FIG. 44 (step S2301). Here, when it is determined that all songs are released (step S2301: YES), specific processing for executing the notification effect is not performed, and the process proceeds to the performance notification effect control process of step S2400. This is illustrated in FIG. 9 because in a state where all the songs are open, the performance of the music performance is performed every hour, the new music used is changed each time, and there is no new music that has not been performed yet. This is because it is not always necessary to perform a notice presentation.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the song is not in an open state (step S2301: NO), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 142, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (step S2302). If it is determined that the music performance effect is not being executed (step S2302: NO), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 142, a notification effect including a countdown display of the remaining time until the music performance effect is started ( It is determined whether or not the process shown in FIG. 9C is being executed (step S2303). If it is determined that the notification effect including the countdown display is being executed (step S2303: YES), the process proceeds to the performance notification effect control process in step S2400.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the announcement effect including the countdown display is not being executed (step S2303: NO), for example, based on the interrupt processing count N counted up in the process of step S2101, the start of the music performance effect It is determined whether or not it is a predetermined time before the time (for example, 15 minutes before) (step S2304).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is a predetermined time ago (step S2304: YES), it sets setting information (including information indicating the remaining time) for causing the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to start a notification effect including a countdown display. It is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2305). A display list for the sub liquid crystal is created based on the setting information and stored in the display list storage area 1491 so that the title of the new song to be performed is announced and the performance of the new song is started. The remaining time until the display is counted down (see FIG. 9C).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not a predetermined time before the music performance effect (step S2304: NO), the overall CPU 141 executes the following processing in order to perform a notification effect on the new song to be performed next to the latest song at the current time. . That is, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not it is the first musical performance performance date as in the process of step S2202 (see FIG. 41) (step S2306).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not the first music performance performance date (step S2306: NO), the sub-liquid crystal display displays a notification performance including an effect to notify the number of days remaining until the first music performance performance date of the new song to be performed next. Setting information to be executed by the device 6 is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2307). Specifically, first, the current date is specified based on the RTC information. Then, the performance management table (see FIG. 40) is referred to, and the first music performance performance date that is later than the current date and closest to the current date is specified. The first performance performance date specified in this way is the first performance performance date of the new song to be performed next. For example, if the current date is November 29, 2013, the first performance performance date corresponding to the above-mentioned conditions is November 30, 2013, and it is determined that the next new performance is the new song A. can do. When the general CPU 141 specifies the first musical performance performance date in this way, the overall CPU 141 calculates the number of days from the current date to the identified first musical performance performance date. In the example described here, the number of days “1” is calculated. In this way, the overall CPU 141 acquires the type of new song to be performed next (the name of the song here) and the number of days until the first performance performance of the new song is performed based on the RTC information and the performance management table. To do. And the setting information of the notification effect corresponding to these acquired information is set. Based on this setting information, a display list for the sub liquid crystal is created and stored in the display list storage area 1491 so that the title of the new song to be performed next and the number of days remaining until the first song performance stage date of the new song, Will be notified (see FIG. 9A).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the first music performance effect date (step S2306: YES), the sub-liquid crystal displays the notification effect including an effect that informs that the first music performance effect, which is an unperformed music performance effect, will be performed today. Setting information to be executed by the display device 6 is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2308). Specifically, processing is performed in the same manner as in step S2306 described above to acquire the type (song name) of the new song to be performed next, and setting information for notification production corresponding to this information is set. Based on this setting information, the display list for the sub liquid crystal is created and stored in the display list storage area 1491, so that it is notified that the title of the unperformed song and the performance performance of the unperformed song will be performed today. (See FIG. 9B).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect is being executed (step S2302: YES), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 142, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the music performance effect has ended (step S2310). . If it is determined that the music performance effect has not ended (step S2310: NO), the process proceeds to the performance notification effect control process in step S2400.

  When the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect has ended (step S2310: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the completed music performance effect is the first music performance effect (step S2311). Specifically, since the performance performance permission flag is set to “ON” at the start of the first performance performance, whether or not the performance performance permission flag is set to “ON” at the start of the performance performance. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not it is the first performance performance. Here, when it is determined that it was not the first music performance effect (step S2311: NO), the process proceeds to the performance notification effect control process in step S2400.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the performance is the first performance performance (step S2311: YES), for example, by referring to the performance performance management table, for example, the overall performance of the new performance is identified. Setting information for causing the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to execute the notification effect image P47 including the effect of notifying the number of days remaining until it is performed (7 days regardless of the type of the new song in this embodiment) is set in the control RAM 145. (Step S2312). The display list for the sub liquid crystal is created based on this setting information and stored in the display list storage area 1491, so that the title of the unperformed song and the number of days until the first performance performance of the unperformed song is performed Is notified (see FIG. 9D).

  In the present embodiment, the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is used only for the notification effect has been described. However, for example, the sub liquid crystal display device 6 performs an effect synchronized with the effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device 5. Thus, you may use the sub liquid crystal display device 6 for uses other than notification production.

[Performance announcement effect control processing by image sound control board 140]
45 and 46 are detailed flowcharts of the performance announcement effect control process in step S2400 of FIG. Subsequent to the notification effect control process in step S2300, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the performance notification flag stored in the control RAM 145 is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 45 ( Step S2401). This performance notification flag is set to “ON” by performing the above-described step S2103 (see FIG. 39). If it is determined that the performance notification flag is not set to “ON” (step S2401: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance production start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the performance notification flag is set to “ON” (step S2401: YES), the general CPU 141 controls the setting information related to the performance notification in response to setting the performance notification flag to “ON”. It is determined whether or not the processing to be set in the RAM 145 has been completed (step S2402). If it is determined that the process for setting the setting information has been completed (step S2402: YES), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the process for setting the setting information has not been completed (step S2402: NO), for example, based on the reception status of the command related to the special game from the effect control board 130, It is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S2403). Here, if it is determined that the special game is not being played (the jackpot game is not being played) (step S2403: NO), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting effect is being performed (step S2404). Specifically, since the customer waiting effect is performed after the customer waiting effect start command is received from the effect control board 130 until the variable effect start command is received, for example, the customer waiting effect start command is received. After that, based on whether or not the change production start command is received, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting production is being performed (step S2404).

  By the way, during the customer waiting effect, the normal effect accompanying the game using the game ball is not performed. For this reason, even if a performance announcement effect unrelated to the normal performance is performed, there is no possibility of impairing the interest of the normal performance. For this reason, when it is determined that the customer waiting effect is being performed (step S2404: YES), the overall CPU 141 identifies a new song to be performed in the music performance effect (step S2405). Specifically, the current date and time (date and time) is specified based on the RTC information, and the start time of the music performance effect that is performed following the current performance announcement effect is specified based on the specified current date and time. More specifically, the current interrupt processing count N is subtracted from the interrupt processing count N when the music performance flag is set to “ON”, and the value obtained by this subtraction is used as the interrupt processing time interval (this implementation In the embodiment, the remaining time until the start time of the musical performance performance is calculated by multiplying by 33 mm). Then, the start time of the music performance effect is specified by adding the remaining time calculated to the specified current date and time. When the general CPU 141 identifies the start time of the music performance effect, the overall CPU 141 identifies a new song used for the music performance effect with reference to the table. That is, when the current state is not the state of all songs released, the performance management table (see FIG. 40) is referred to determine which new song is used at the start time of the specified music performance effect. On the other hand, when the current state is an all-song open state, it is determined which new song is used at the start time of the specified music performance production with reference to the music performance production order management table (see FIG. 43). .

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2405, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for starting the performance announcement effect relating to the specified new song in the control RAM 145 (step S2406). When the setting information is set, a display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the setting information, and the created display list is stored in the display list storage area 1491. As a result, the performance announcement effect is started.

  In this way, the general CPU 141 is in the stage of waiting for a customer when a predetermined time (1 minute in the present embodiment) before the start time of the music performance effect, that is, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached, Immediately start the performance announcement performance.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not during the customer waiting effect (step S2404: NO), for example, the elapsed time since receiving the change effect start command instructing the start of the normal effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol. Based on, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation display is in progress (step S2407).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress (step S2407: YES), the development start flag, the prohibition flag, and the post-end start flag stored in the control RAM 145 are displayed. It is determined whether or not the flag setting process has been completed based on whether or not “ON” is set (step S2408). These three flags will be described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the flag setting process has not been completed (step S2408: NO), that is, if all of the above three flags are set to “OFF”, the current special symbol variation display ends. The remaining time until this is calculated (step S2409). Specifically, for example, the variation time of the special symbol is specified based on the variation effect start command received from the effect control board 130, and the elapsed time from the reception of the variation effect start command to the current time is specified. The remaining time is calculated by subtracting.

  By the way, if the variation effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol ends before the start time of the music performance effect, the end timing of the end of the current variation effect or the change effect accompanying the change display of the next special symbol starts. The switching timing of the fluctuation effect such as the start timing to be performed exists before the start time of the music performance effect. In such a case, if the performance announcement effect is started at the end timing or the start timing, it is possible to prevent the interest of the variation effect from being impaired by the performance notification effect.

  For this reason, the general CPU 141 follows this step S2409 based on whether or not the time obtained by adding the remaining time calculated to the current time is a time before the start time of the music performance effect. It is determined whether or not the variation effect that is being executed with the variation display of the special symbol ends before the music performance effect is started (step S2410). Here, if it is determined that the music performance effect is ended before the start of the music performance effect (step S2410: YES), the post-end start flag is set to “ON” (step S2411). This after-start flag is a flag indicating whether or not the performance announcement effect is to be started after the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol this time is ended. For this reason, when the after-start flag is set to “ON”, the performance announcement effect is started at the timing when the current variation effect ends or when the next variation effect starts.

  On the other hand, if the general CPU 141 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time is not finished before the music performance effect is started (step S2410: NO), the music performance effect is started. It is determined whether or not there is a development timing in the variation effect before (step S2412). Specifically, the variation production start command received from the production control board 130 is analyzed, and there is a development timing such as development from normal reach to super reach, for example, in the variation production being executed along with the special symbol variation display. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the development timing exists, it is determined whether or not the time corresponding to the development timing is before the start time of the specified music performance effect.

  By the way, in order to prevent the performance announcement effect from damaging the interest of the variation production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time, it is preferable to start the performance announcement production after the variation production ends. However, if such a configuration is adopted when the variation production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time is not finished before the music performance production starts, the performance announcement production will be performed during the music performance production. The problem arises. For this reason, it is preferable not to perform the performance announcement effect when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time does not end before the music performance effect starts. On the other hand, if the variation effect of one time performed from the start to the end of the special symbol variation display has the development timing, that is, the switching timing of the production, the variation production at the development timing. If the image is switched to the reduced display and the performance announcement effect is started, it is possible to prevent the performance announcement effect from damaging the interest of the variation effect.

  Therefore, if the general CPU 141 determines that there is a development timing in the variable performance before the music performance performance is started (step S2412: YES), the general CPU 141 sets the development start flag to “ON” (step S2413). . Here, the development start flag is a flag indicating whether or not the performance announcement effect is started at the development timing of the effect in the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that there is no development timing in the variable production before the music performance production is started (step S2412: NO), the general CPU 141 starts from the performance announcement production start time to the music performance production start time. Since there is no development (separation) timing of the variation effect in between, the prohibition flag is set to “ON” in order to prevent the performance announcement effect from being performed and the interest of the variation effect from being spoiled (step S2414). Here, the prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not execution of the performance announcement effect is prohibited.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2411, executes the process of step S2413, executes the process of step S2414, or determines that the flag setting process has been completed (step S2408: YES). Then, it is determined whether or not the prohibition flag is set to “ON” (step S2417). If it is determined that the prohibition flag is set to “ON” (step S2417: YES), the process proceeds to a music performance effect start process in step S2500. As described above, when the prohibition flag is set to “ON”, the process cannot proceed to the above-described steps S2405 and S2406, so that the performance announcement effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, when determining that the prohibition flag is not set to “ON” (step S2417: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the development start flag is set to “ON” (step S2418). . If it is determined that the development start flag is not set to “ON” (step S2418: NO), the process proceeds to a music performance effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the development start flag is set to “ON” (step S2418: YES), it becomes the development timing based on the analysis result of the variable production start command related to the current normal production. It is determined whether or not (step S2419). If it is determined that the development timing is not reached (step S2419: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the development timing has come (step S2419: YES), the overall CPU 141 executes the processes of steps S2405 and S2406 described above.

  As described above, the overall CPU 141 specifies the development timing of the dynamic production (production switching timing) based on the variable production start command received from the production control board 130, and determines that the start time of the performance announcement production has been reached. The performance announcement effect in the upper region A1 is started at the specified development timing before the start time of the music performance effect.

  On the other hand, after the current special symbol variation display is completed, the following processing is performed. That is, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S2407: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the after-start flag is set to “ON” (step S2421). If it is determined that the after-start flag is not set to “ON” (step S2421: NO), the process proceeds to a music performance effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the after-start flag is set to “ON” (step S2421: YES), for example, based on the reception status of the hold display command and the variable effect start command from the effect control board 130, It is determined whether or not the first special symbol determination is suspended (step S2422). If it is determined that the first special symbol determination is not suspended (step S2422: NO), it is determined whether or not a variable effect end command is received from the effect control board 130 (step S2423). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect end command has not been received (step S2423: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process of step S2500.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable effect end command has been received (step S2423: YES), the process proceeds to step S2405 and step S2406 described above. When the first special symbol determination is not suspended at the end of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time, the end timing of the variation effect associated with the variation display of the special symbol this time is the switching timing of the effect. For this reason, in such a case, the performance announcement effect is started at the timing when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time ends.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the first special symbol determination is suspended (step S2422: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not a variable effect start command is received from the effect control board 130 (step S2424). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect start command has not been received (step S2424: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process of step S2500.

  By the way, when the variation effect start command is received immediately after the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is completed, the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the next special symbol is started accordingly. . For this reason, the timing at which the variation display of the special symbol is started after the variation display of the special symbol is finished, that is, the timing at which the next variation effect is started in response to the variation effect start command is also the switching timing of the effect. Become. For this reason, when the overall CPU 141 determines that the change effect start command has been received (step S2424: YES), the overall CPU 141 executes the processes of steps S2405 and S2406 described above.

  As described above, when the special symbol is variably displayed at the start time of the performance announcement effect, the overall CPU 141 causes the main liquid crystal display device 5 to start the performance announcement effect after the end of the variation display.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that a special game (during jackpot game) is in progress (step S2403: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 46, it determines whether or not a long game is being played (step S2403). S2426). When a long winning game is performed, an opening effect start command, an in-round effect start command, and an ending effect start command are transmitted from the effect control board 130 as commands for instructing the execution of the hit effect accompanying the long win game. On the other hand, when a short hit game is performed, a short hit effect start command and a short hit effect end command are transmitted from the effect control board 130. For this reason, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the long hit game is being executed based on which command of these commands is being executed.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that a long game is being played (step S2426: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is before the start of the final round (step S2427). Here, when it is determined that it is not before the start of the final round (step S2427: NO), the process proceeds to step S2435 described later.

  By the way, during a long hit game, an in-round effect start command is transmitted from the effect control board 130 every time a long open round game is started, and an in-round effect is performed for each round. In the in-round effect, at least a part of the display content (for example, a display indicating the current number of rounds) is updated each time the in-round effect start command is received by the image sound control board 140. In other words, every time the effect start command during round is received by the image sound control board 140, the hit effect accompanying the long hit game is switched.

  Therefore, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is before the start of the final round (step S2427: YES), it determines whether or not an in-round effect start command has been received from the effect control board 130 (step S2428). Here, when it is determined that the in-round production start command has not been received (step S2428: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance production start process in step S2500.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the production start command during the round has been received (step S2428: YES), the general CPU 141 identifies a new song to be performed in the music performance production (step S2429) and announces the performance related to the identified new song. Setting information for starting the effect is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2430). The processes in steps S2429 and S2430 are performed in the same manner as the processes in steps S2405 and S2406 described above.

  In this way, the general CPU 141 causes the main liquid crystal display device 5 to start the performance announcement effect after the long release round game is ended when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached during the long release round game. In this embodiment, the case where the performance announcement effect is started at the timing when the next long open round game is started after the long release round game being executed at the start time of the performance announcement effect is described. For example, the performance notification effect may be started at the timing when the long open round game being executed ends at the start time of the performance notification effect.

  Here, the relationship between the start time of the performance announcement effect and the time required for the long open round game will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the start time, which is the time from the start time of the performance announcement effect to the start time of the music performance effect, is set to 1 minute. On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 47A, if the start time is set to 20 seconds, the in-round effect that is being executed when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached, The music performance may end after the performance start time. That is, since there is no timing for switching the hit effect associated with the long hit game at the start time, if the performance announcement effect is started somewhere during the start time, the interest of the hit effect is surely lost.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the start time of the performance announcement effect is set to a time sufficiently longer than the time required for digesting one long open round game (up to 29 seconds). In other words, the start time of the performance announcement effect is set to be longer than the longest time during which the effect during one round is executed. For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 47 (B), the in-round production that is being executed when the start time of the performance announcement production ends ends before the start time of the music performance production, and the next round Production will be started during the round. In the present embodiment, since the performance notification effect is started at the start of the production during the round, the performance notification effect can be started without impairing the interest of the music performance effect.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the music selected by the player may be played during the long hit game. When the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is started during the reproduction of such music, it is necessary to stop the reproduction of the music. However, if the player selects a desired piece of music but that piece of music is not played to the end, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is started during the reproduction of the music, the reproduction of the music is stopped and the reproduction of the music is restarted from the beginning after the music performance effect is finished. I am going to do that. In order to realize such control, the following processing is performed following the processing in step S2430.

  That is, following step S2430, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the selected music piece is being played based on, for example, whether or not the VDP 142 is performing a drawing process related to the music piece playback (step S2430). S2431). If it is determined that the music is not being reproduced (step S2431: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music is being played back (step S2431: YES), the overall CPU 141 causes the VDP 142 and the sound DSP 143 to stop playing the music (step S2432). Then, music information that can specify the type of the music for which playback has been stopped is stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2433), and the replay flag stored in the control RAM 145 is set to “ON” (step S2434). This replay flag is a flag indicating whether or not to start playing the music corresponding to the music information after the music performance effect is finished.

  By the way, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached after the last round in the long hit game is started, a process for changing the effect during the round by receiving the in-round production start command is performed before the long hit game ends. There is no. For this reason, in such a case, the performance announcement effect is started at the timing when the ending of the long hit game is completed.

  Further, the short win effect associated with the short hit game is a series from the start of the short hit game to the end of the ending, and there is no switch timing of the output in the middle. For this reason, when it becomes the start time of the performance announcement effect during the short hit game, the performance announcement effect is started at the timing when the ending of the short hit game ends.

  For this reason, when the general CPU 141 determines that the game is not long hit (step S2426: NO), and determines that it is not before the final round (step S2427: NO), for example, an ending effect start command (or short hit) It is determined whether or not the ending of the long hit game (or short hit game) has ended based on the elapsed time since the reception of the effect end command) (step S2435). If it is determined that the ending has not ended (step S2435: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process in step S2500. Conversely, if it is determined that the ending has ended (step S2435: YES), the process proceeds to step S2429 and the performance announcement effect is started.

  As described above, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached after the long release round game of the last round in the long hit game is started, the performance notification effect is started after the end of the long release round game is ended. In addition, if it is the start time of the performance announcement during the short opening round game in the short hit game, the performance announcement effect will be performed after all the short opening round games executed continuously with this short opening round game are completed. Let it begin.

  Here, the relationship between the start time of the performance announcement effect and the time required for the short hit game will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the start time related to the performance announcement effect is set to 1 minute. On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 48 (A), if the start time is set to 20 seconds, the short hit effect that is being executed when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached, The music performance will end after the start time of the performance. In other words, since there is no timing for switching the short win effect associated with the short hit game at the start time, if the performance announcement effect is started somewhere during the start time, the interest of the win effect is surely lost. .

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the start time of the performance announcement effect is set to a time sufficiently longer than the time (for example, 30 seconds) required to digest one short hit game. In other words, the start time of the performance announcement effect is set to a time sufficiently longer than the total time required to digest a plurality of continuous (15 times in this embodiment) short open round games. For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 48B, the short hit effect that is being executed when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached ends before the start time of the music performance effect. And in this embodiment, since the performance announcement effect is started with the start of the variation display of the special symbol resumed after the short winning effect accompanying this short winning game is ended, the interest of the winning effect and the variable effect is impaired. The performance announcement can be started without any problems.

[Music performance production start processing by the image sound control board 140]
FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the music performance production start process in step S2500 of FIG. Subsequent to the performance announcement effect control process in step S2400, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the music performance flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 49 (step S2501). If it is determined that the music performance flag is not set to “ON” (step S2501: NO), the process proceeds to the normal performance control process in step S2600.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance flag is set to “ON” (step S2501: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets all the flags related to the performance announcement effect to “OFF” (step S2502). Here, all the flags relating to the performance announcement effect are specifically the performance announcement flag, the after-start flag, the development start flag, and the prohibition flag shown in FIG.

  Following the processing in step S2502, the overall CPU 141 identifies the current date based on the latest RTC information stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2503), and the current state is determined in the same manner as in step S2107. It is determined whether or not all songs are released (step S2504).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are not released (step S2504: NO), the overall CPU 141 sets the performance management table (see FIG. 40) stored in the control ROM 144 in the control RAM 145 (step S2505). A new song corresponding to the date is selected (step S2506). For example, when the current date is December 3, 2013, this date is November 30, 2013, which is the first song performance stage date of the new song A, and December 7, 2013, which is the first song performance stage date of the new song B. Since the date is between the dates, the new song A is selected. For example, when the current date is December 7, 2013, this date is December 7, 2013, which is the first musical performance performance date of the new song B, so the new song B is selected.

  By the way, when the date of performing the music performance effect is a date other than the first music performance effect date, there is one type of new music used for the music performance effect on that day. On the other hand, if the date on which the performance of the music performance is performed is a day corresponding to the date of the performance of the first music performance, the type of the new song changes before and after the transition to the musical performance performance permission state, There are two types of new songs. For this reason, when the current date is the first performance performance date, it is necessary to determine which of the two types of new songs is used.

  Therefore, the overall CPU 141 follows the processing of step S2506 based on whether or not the current date corresponds to one of the first performance performance dates specified in the performance management table. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2507). If it is determined that the date is not the first performance date (step S2507: NO), setting information for executing the performance performance of the new song selected in step S2506 is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2508). ). When the setting information related to the musical performance performance is set in the control RAM 145 in this way, a display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the setting information and set in the display list storage area 1491. As a result, the musical performance performance selected in step S2506 is started.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the first performance performance date (step S2507: YES), it determines whether or not the performance performance permission flag stored in the control RAM 145 is set to “ON”. (Step S2507).

  As illustrated in FIG. 40, when the current date is, for example, December 7, 2013 corresponding to the first song performance stage date of the new song B and the song performance stage permission flag is set to “ON”, It is necessary to set setting information for executing the first performance performance of the new song B. On the other hand, when the current date is, for example, December 7, 2013 corresponding to the initial performance performance date of the new song B and the performance performance permission flag is set to “OFF”, it is not the new song B. It is necessary to set setting information for executing the performance performance of the new song A immediately before the new song B.

  Therefore, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance presentation permission flag is set to “ON” (step S2509: YES), the process of step S2506 is performed as in the case where it is determined that it is not the first music performance presentation date. Setting information for executing the performance performance of the new song selected in step S2508 is set. Conversely, when it is determined that the music performance presentation permission flag is not set to “ON” (step S2509: NO), that is, when the music performance presentation permission flag is set to “OFF”, the selection is made in the process of step S2506. The setting information for executing the performance performance of the new song immediately before the new song is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2510).

  As described above, the overall CPU 141 determines that the initial music performance directing permission time specified in the performance management table has passed and sets the music performance directing permission flag to “ON”, and then the elapsed time reaches 1 hour. When it is determined that the time condition is satisfied, the main liquid crystal display device 5 is caused to start the first music performance performance of the new song (new song B in the above example). On the other hand, if it is determined that the above time condition is satisfied in a state where it has not been determined that the first musical performance performance permission time has passed, the first musical performance that has already been performed is performed without performing the first musical performance performance of the new song. Execute the performance of the new song.

  Subsequent to step S2508, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the musical performance performance permission flag is set to “ON” (step S2511). If it is determined that the music performance effect permission flag is set to “ON” (step S2511: YES), the music performance effect permission flag is set to “OFF” (step S2512).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are open (step S2504: YES), the overall performance stage management table (see FIG. 43) is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2514). Based on the reset processing count P stored in the control RAM 145, the elapsed time since the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S2515). Here, the reset processing count P is set to “0” when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S2108 (see FIG. 39) is performed. For this reason, the overall CPU 141 specifies the reset processing count P immediately after determining that the music performance flag is set to “ON” as the elapsed time. For example, when the number of reset processing is updated to “1”, it can be determined that 1 hour has passed at the update timing, and when updated to “3”, 3 hours have passed at the update timing. It can be judged.

  Subsequent to step S2515, the overall CPU 141 selects a new song corresponding to the current date specified in step S2503 and the elapsed time specified in step S2515 (step S2516). Specifically, the type of the new song corresponding to the specified current date and the elapsed time since the power is turned on is read from the music performance presentation order management table. For example, if the current date is February 23 and three hours have passed since the power is turned on, the new song C is selected. For example, if the current date is February 27 and 10 hours have passed since the power is turned on, the new song B is selected.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2516, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for executing the music performance effect of the selected new song in the control RAM 145, similarly to the process of step S2508 (step S2517). The processing of step S2514 to step S2517 is performed every time one hour elapses with reference to the time when the power is turned on in the state where all songs are released.

  When it is determined in the process of step S2511 that the music performance effect permission flag is not set to “ON”, or after the process of step S2512 or after the process of step S2517, the music performance flag is set to “OFF”. After setting (step S2518), the process proceeds to the normal effect control process of step S2600.

  In this way, the overall CPU 141 individually sets the execution timings of the music performance effects of the new songs A to L on the current date, and causes the music performance effects of each new song to be executed at the set execution timing.

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the execution timing of the music performance effect of each new music in an all-song open state was set using the music performance effect order management table illustrated in FIG. 43, as other embodiment, The following configuration may be adopted. That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the execution timings of all new songs are defined in the music performance presentation order management table has been described. However, the execution date and the music performance presentation that is executed first on the execution date are used. A new song type may be stored in association with the new song, and the new song may be regularly selected, for example, as a new song D, a new song E, or a new song F based on the new song.

  In addition, a configuration is adopted in which information indicating a new song (for example, new song F) used for the first performance performance of the previous day is held, and the next day (for example, new song G) is selected in order from the next song. May be.

  Also, instead of storing information that prescribes the execution timing, such as the music performance production order management table, for example, a random selection using random numbers in a state where all songs are open, and a new song used for the music performance production is randomly selected. It may be determined. In this case, information indicating the type of a new song already used in the performance of the music performance is retained so that the performance of the same music is not performed more than once a day, and the song is selected by the selection lottery. Then, a configuration of redoing the selection lottery may be added.

  As described above, the overall CPU 141 controls the start timing of the music performance effect and the type of the new song to be used based on the elapsed time measurement result, the RTC information, the performance management table, and the music performance effect order management table. That is, regardless of whether the special symbols are variably displayed by the special symbol indicators 41 and 42 or during the special game (during the big hit game), the main liquid crystal display device 5 is caused to execute the music performance effect. .

  As described above with reference to FIG. 49, if it is determined in step S2504 that all songs are in the open state, the song performance management table is set in step S2514, and the new song performed in the song performance effect is changed every time in step S2516. It will be done. Therefore, the special performance is changed every time.

[Flow of productions when transitioning from normal production mode to special production mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 55, the flow of each effect will be described when shifting from the normal effect mode to the special effect mode (performance announcement effect and music performance effect).

[When changing to the special performance mode when the variable performance is not performed]
FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the production when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is not performed in the normal effect mode.

FIG. 50A shows the start time of the performance announcement effect which is a special effect executed in the special effect mode when the customer power-waiting state is in the normal effect mode in the normal power mode in which the power saving mode is not in operation. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the effect in case of becoming.
As shown in FIG. 50 (A), when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting command is transmitted from the game control board 100, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In this customer waiting state, a customer waiting effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 50 (A), a customer waiting effect image consisting of the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a promotional video of this model is displayed in the entire area. (See FIG. 50A-1).

Also, in this customer waiting effect, the remaining time from the end of the previous music performance until the start of the next music performance effect is always counted down at the top of the customer waiting effect image. The start time of the next performance performance will be appealed to the musicians. Therefore, the player who will play a game from now on can recognize the start time of the next musical performance performance. In addition, when a new song to be performed next time is introduced together with displaying the remaining time until the next performance performance of the music is displayed, the appeal effect for the player who will play the game is further enhanced.
The remaining time display (countdown display) until the next music performance effect displayed in the customer waiting effect is displayed in order to prompt the player to start the music performance effect together with the remaining time display on the menu screen described above. This corresponds to the second remaining time notification (countdown notification).

  When the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached with such a waiting-to-stand performance, the variation effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is not performed, so it is normal even if the performance announcement effect is started immediately There is no risk of impairing the entertainment of the production. For this reason, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached while the customer waiting effect is being performed, the entire region display is shifted to the region division display, and the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed in the upper region A1 of the region division display. As a result, the performance announcement effect is immediately started (see FIG. 50A-2).

In this case, since the start time of the performance announcement effect is the same as the actual start time, the countdown display is started from 60 seconds. In addition, since it was a customer waiting state at the time of the start of a performance notification production | presentation, the decoration pattern P22 of the stop display state in the last change production | generation is dot-displayed in lower area A2.
In the customer waiting state, a display may be made so that the player can recognize that the customer is waiting in the lower area A2.
The countdown display for 60 seconds displayed in this performance notification effect corresponds to first remaining time notification (countdown notification) for prompting the player to start the music performance effect.

  Thereafter, when the start time of the music performance effect is reached, the music performance effect is started by displaying the music performance effect image P48 in the upper area A1 that has been used for the performance announcement effect until then (FIG. 50A-3). )reference). If the right to determine the special symbol is not generated even when the music performance effect end time is reached, the display of the customer waiting effect image using the entire area is resumed (see FIG. 50 (A-4)). .

  In addition, regarding FIG. 50 (A), the flow of the production when the start time of the performance announcement production, which is a special production executed in the special production mode, is in the customer waiting state in the normal production mode in the power saving mode. As mentioned above, “Under power saving performance until XX minutes XX seconds” (Standby production) → “Performance until XX seconds” (performance announcement production) → “Now until △△△ performance is over ○ “Minute XX seconds” (music performance production) “→“ During power saving XX minutes XX seconds ”(waiting for customers).

FIG. 50B is an explanatory diagram for describing the flow of the effect when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached when the variable effect is being stopped and displayed.
As shown in FIG. 50 (B), the right to determine the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is not held (there is no hold memory and the fluctuation associated with the special symbol fluctuation display) In the state where the effect is stopped and displayed), the change stop image of the change effect accompanying the previous change display of the special symbol is displayed in the entire area (see FIG. 50B-1).
In such a state, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached, there is no change effect accompanying the game using the game ball, so there is a possibility that even if the performance announcement effect is started immediately, the interest of the change effect will be impaired. Absent. For this reason, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached while the customer waiting effect is being performed, the entire region display is shifted to the region division display, and the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed in the upper region A1 of the region division display. Thus, the performance announcement effect using the upper region A1 is immediately started (see FIG. 50 (B-2)).
In this case, since the start time of the performance announcement effect is the same as the actual start time, the countdown display is started from 60 seconds. In addition, since it was a stop display state at the time of the start of a performance announcement effect, the decoration pattern P22 of the stop display state in the last change effect is displayed in the lower area A2.

Thereafter, when the right to determine the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is generated, the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is displayed by the decorative symbol P22 displayed in a dot display stopped in the lower area A2. Start (see FIG. 50 (B-3)).
Then, when the start time of the music performance effect is reached during the fluctuating effect that has started to change to the performance announcement effect, the music performance effect using the upper region A1 is displayed by displaying the music performance effect image P48 in the upper region A1. The process is started (see FIG. 50 (B-4)).

  And, when the end time of the music performance effect is reached, if the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern P22 that has started to fluctuate before the end time of the music performance effect is performed in the lower area A2, this variable effect ends. Up to the above, area division display is performed (see FIG. 50 (B-5)), and after this variation effect is completed, the transition effect is changed to the variation effect using the entire region in the normal effect mode (see FIG. 50 (B-6)). ).

As shown in FIG. 50 (B-6), there are the following four methods for switching from area division display to whole area display.
The first method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 has received the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main CPU 101, and shifts to the normal performance mode at the timing when the general CPU 141 receives the variable effect end command transmitted from the sub CPU 131. Then, a method of switching from area division display to whole area display (method 1 based on the symbol determination command transmitted from the main CPU 101).

  The second method is to start the fluctuation before the end of the music performance effect, and when the change storage is stopped and displayed after the end of the music performance effect, the stored memory is stored. Until the variation effect for is finished, the area division display is continued. Based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 receives the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the variation effect for the last hold memory among all the hold memories. A method of switching from area division display to whole area display at the timing when the central CPU 141 receives the change effect end command transmitted from the sub CPU 131 (method 2 based on the symbol determination command transmitted from the main CPU 101).

  The third method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 receives the next variation start command transmitted from the main CPU 101, and at the timing when the general CPU 141 receives the variation effect start command transmitted from the sub CPU 131. (1) based on a change start command transmitted from the main CPU 101.

The fourth method is to start the fluctuation before the end of the music performance effect, and when the change effect is stopped and displayed after the end of the music performance effect, the stored memory is stored. Until the variation effect for is finished, the area division display is continued, and after the last variation effect of all the stored memories is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 131 receives the next variation start command transmitted from the main CPU 101. Based on the above, at the timing when the central CPU 141 receives the change effect start command transmitted from the sub CPU 131, the method is switched from the area division display to the entire area display (method 2 based on the change start command transmitted from the main CPU 101). .
By using any of these methods, it is possible to shift from the area division display to the entire area display after the end of the variation effect.
As described above, when switching from the area division display to the entire area display after the end of the variation effect, the sub CPU 131 displays a new command transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the end of the variation effect. It is based on having received it.

In the case of adopting the second method and the fourth method described above, when the number of reserved memories related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved and stored when the performance of the music performance is finished, the stored information is reserved and stored. The special effect mode is extended until the variable effects for all the stored memory numbers are stopped and displayed. In the special effect mode extension period, the second special effect that is a special effect peculiar to the special effect mode extension period is displayed. You may make it perform. In addition, during the special effect mode extension period, a mini game that is not related to the variable effect may be played. By doing in this way, gameability can be improved.
Note that this special effect mode extension period may be provided as part of the normal effect mode. That is, the normal effect mode may be provided with a first normal effect mode and a second normal effect mode, and the special effect mode extension period may be the second normal effect mode. In this case, after the special effect mode is finished, if the reserved memory number is reserved, the process shifts to the second normal effect mode, and when all the variable effects of the reserved memory number are ended, the process shifts to the first normal effect mode. become.
In the second method and the fourth method described above, “if the variation starts before the music performance effect ends, and when the variation effect is stopped and displayed after the music performance effect ends, the hold memory is stored. "If the number of reserved memories related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved and stored when the musical performance performance ends," can be considered.

[When transitioning to special production mode during variable production]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the production in the normal production mode when the start time of the performance announcement production, which is a special production executed in the special production mode, during the production of the fluctuation accompanying the fluctuation display of the special symbol. It is explanatory drawing.

FIG. 51A is an explanatory diagram in the case where the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is finished by the music performance effect start time, but this variation effect is not finished by the performance notification effect start time.
As shown in FIG. 51 (A), the change effect (see FIG. 51 (A-1)) accompanying the change display of the special symbol started to change before the start time of the performance announcement effect is the start time of the performance announcement effect. In the case of ending before the start time of the music performance effect, the whole region display is shifted to the region division display after the variation effect is ended.
Then, the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed in the upper area A1 of the divided area display, and the decorative pattern P22 displayed in dots is displayed in the lower area A2 (see FIG. 51 (A-2)). Thereafter, at the stage when the start time of the music performance effect is reached, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the special effect area A1 of the divided area display (see FIG. 51 (A-3)).

  In FIG. 51A-2, there are two methods for shifting from the whole area display to the area division display after the end of the changing effect.

  The first method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 has received the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main CPU 101, and at the timing when the general CPU 141 has received the variable effect end command transmitted from the sub CPU 131, A method of shifting to split display (a method based on a symbol determination command transmitted from the main CPU 101).

The second method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 receives the next change start command transmitted from the main CPU 101, and displays the entire area display at the timing when the general CPU 141 receives the change effect start command transmitted from the sub CPU 131. To shift to area division display (method based on a change start command transmitted from the main CPU 101).
By using any of these methods, it is possible to shift from the entire area display to the area division display after the end of the change effect.
As described above, when shifting from the entire area display to the area division display after the end of the variation effect, the sub-CPU 131 displays a new command transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the end of the variation effect. Is based on the reception.

  FIG. 51 (B) shows a case where the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol does not end even if it becomes the start time of the music performance effect, and a break is provided in this variable effect until the start time of the music performance effect. FIG. For example, if the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached during the execution of the change effect accompanying the long change in which the change time of the special symbol exceeds 1 minute in the normal effect mode, the change effect is generated even if the start time of the music performance effect is reached. May not end.

  In addition, as an example of the break provided during the fluctuating production, it accompanies a series of special symbols that change from a normal reach with a relatively low jackpot expectation to a so-called super reach with a relatively high jackpot expectation. For example, the point of scene change in the variable production.

  For example, [variation start → pseudo continuous notice (big hit notice) → normal reach (expected degree: low) → SP reach (expected degree: medium) → SPSP reach (expected degree: high) → stop display (result of success / failure)] In this case, any one or a plurality of locations indicated by “→” can be set as a segment of the variation effect. Needless to say, if it is a variation production that does not develop to SPSP reach like this variation production, any one or more of them may be used as long as it is a break provided so far, and it develops more than SPSP reach. As long as it is a fluctuating effect, any one or more of them may be used as long as it is a break provided so far. Further, the content of the variation effect is not limited to the illustrated variation effect.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the variation performance (see FIG. 51 (B-1)) accompanied by the variation display of the special symbol that has started to vary in the normal performance mode before the start time of the performance announcement performance is the music performance. If it does not end by the start time of the production, and there is a break in this variation production by the start time of the performance of the music performance, the timing of the division of the change production (for example, the timing of development to reach, the big hit in the reach) At the time of development to a super-reach with high expectation, etc.), the reduced performance announcement effect image P47 is superimposed on the variation effect image of the change effect that is continuously displayed (FIG. 51 (B-2)). reference).

Thereafter, the music performance effect image P48 reduced in place of the reduced performance announcement effect image P47 is superimposed and displayed on the variation effect image of the variable effect continuously displayed at the start time of the music performance effect (FIG. 51 (B-3)).
After that, at the timing when the variation effect is finished, the display screen is shifted from the whole area display to the area division display. Then, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the special effect region A1, and the decorative pattern P22 displayed in dots is displayed in the lower region A2 (see FIG. 51 (B-4)).

  Note that even after the start of the music performance effect, the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol does not end, but there is a break in the variation effect (a break is set between FIGS. 51B-3 and 51B-4). In this case, the display screen is shifted from the whole area display to the area division display at the timing of the division, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the special effect region A1, and the ongoing variation effect is displayed in dots. The decorative pattern P22 may be displayed in the lower area A2.

FIG. 51 (C) shows a variation effect (see FIG. 51 (C-1)) with a variation display of a special symbol started to vary in the normal performance mode before the start time of the performance announcement effect. It is explanatory drawing in case the variation production accompanying the variation display of a special symbol is not complete | finished by the time, and there is also no division | segmentation of a variation production.
As shown in FIG. 51C, when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol does not end by the start time of the music performance effect, and there is no break in the variation effect, the display of the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed. Is not performed (see FIG. 51C-1).
Then, at the start time of the music performance effect, the reduced music performance effect image P48 is superimposed and displayed on the variation effect image of the variable effect that is continuously displayed (see FIG. 51 (C-2)).
Thereafter, after the variation effect is finished, the whole area display is shifted to the area division display. Then, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the upper area A1 of the divided area display, and the decorative design P22 displayed in dots is displayed in the lower area A2 (see FIG. 51 (C-3)).

  In FIGS. 51B and 51C, the timing for shifting from the entire area display to the area division display is the timing based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted by the main CPU 101 by the sub CPU 131 or the main CPU 101. A timing based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 has received the next variation start command that has been transmitted can be considered.

  As described above, when the variation effect does not end by the set time of the special effect mode, the decorative pattern P12 displayed in the normal effect mode before the transition to the special effect mode is completed until the change effect ends. The game effect image is continuously displayed as it is. As a result, the variation effect can be displayed without interruption, so that the player can enjoy the lottery game. On the other hand, since the special effect image is also displayed, the player can enjoy both effects.

  In the present embodiment, the music performance performance is configured to always start at a predetermined time. On the other hand, the performance announcement effect is a notification of the music performance effect, and the priority as the effect to be executed is set lower than that of the music performance effect. For this reason, the performance announcement effect is executed as much as possible within a range in which there is no influence on the effect of the symbol variation, such as after the symbol variation is completed or from the timing of the symbol variation delimiter. Thus, in this embodiment, the player can enjoy both the game effect and the special effect in a well-balanced manner.

  51 (B) and 51 (C), when there is a delimiter, the timing of demarcation of the variation effect (for example, the timing to develop to reach, the timing to develop to super reach with a high jackpot expectation in reach, etc.) ), The reduced performance announcement effect image P47 (or the music performance effect image P48) is superimposed and displayed on the variation effect image of the variation effect that is continuously displayed (FIGS. 51B-2, C). -2))), but in such a case, the interest may be reduced for a player who wants to enjoy the variable effects such as reach.

  As an example in this case, the performance announcement effect (a super-reaching or more, three or more pseudo-continuous notices, a notice with a high degree of expectation, etc.) that is a jackpot expectation degree of a certain level or more is executed first ( Alternatively, when the music performance effect is started, the performance notification effect (or music performance effect) may not be executed (interrupted) or the image may not be displayed until the variation effect ends.

As another example, the change effect selected when the change pattern specified from the change start command received from the main CPU 101 is a big hit expectation degree higher than a certain level may not be provided with a delimiter setting. Good. As a result, when the variation effect of the jackpot expectation degree of a certain level or more is executed first, the performance announcement effect image P47 (or the music performance effect image P48) is not displayed until the variation effect ends. The performance announcement effect image P47 (or the music performance effect image P48) is displayed after the end of the change effect.
By adopting these exemplified methods, the interest of the player who wants to enjoy the variable effects such as reach is not reduced.

[Processing of the game effect performed when shifting to the special effect mode]
Subsequently, a game effect performed when the mode is shifted to the special effect mode will be described.
FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timing chart of symbol variation, jackpot effect, and special effect, which are variation effects.
In the present embodiment, even when the special effect is executed in the special effect mode, the special effect and the game effect are performed. Then, during the transition to the special effect mode, the decorative symbols P22 are all stopped (at the time of the arrow “A” in the figure), and the jackpot game effect is generated (at the time of the arrow “I” in the figure). ).
This aspect has a large profit for the player and a high priority as an effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, in these aspects, the game effect is given priority over the special effect.
Hereinafter, an effect performed at the time point of arrow A in FIG. 52 and an effect based on the time point of arrow A in FIG. 52 will be described in order.

[Processing of the game effect performed when shifting to the special effect mode]
FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect when the decorative symbols P22 are aligned in the special effect mode. For comparison, FIG. 53 (A) shows the effect when the decorative pattern P12 is aligned in the normal effect mode, and FIG. 53 (B) shows the effect when the decorative pattern P12 is aligned in the special effect mode. The effect mode is displayed.
As shown in FIG. 53 (A), in the normal effect mode, a game in which the operation effective period of 3 seconds is counted down and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 26 when 5 seconds before the decorative symbols P12 are aligned. Person participation production. When the effect button 26 is operated by the player within the operation effective period, or when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 26 being operated, the sub liquid crystal display device 6 and the logo accessory 7 are movable. The accessory moves to the front of the image display unit 114. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect image P51 that displays the periphery of the movable accessory brightly so as to emphasize the movable accessory is displayed on the display screen 114a.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), in the special effect mode as well as in the normal effect mode, when the decorative symbol P12 is 5 seconds before, the operation effective period 3 seconds is displayed in a countdown manner, and the player is informed. A player participation effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 26 is performed. When the effect button 26 is operated by the player within the operation effective period, or when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 26 being operated, the sub liquid crystal display device 6 and the logo accessory 7 are movable. The accessory moves to the front of the image display unit 114. Furthermore, also in the special effect mode, an effect image P51 that brightly displays the periphery of the movable accessory so as to emphasize the movable accessory is displayed on the display screen 114a. At this time, the effect image P51 is displayed so as to overlap the performance notification effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48. That is, at this timing, the game effect image is displayed with priority over the special effect image.

As described above, when the transition is made to the special effect mode, the game effect image such as the decoration symbol P22 is displayed smaller than the game effect image such as the decoration symbol P12 displayed in the normal effect mode. On the other hand, special effect images such as the performance announcement effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48 are displayed relatively large. Therefore, in the special effect mode, it is difficult for the player to notice the alignment of the decorative symbols P22.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, even after the transition to the special effect mode, as in the normal effect mode, the effect image P51 that operates the movable accessory and further emphasizes the movable accessory is displayed on the screen of the image display unit 114. By displaying it, the player can easily understand that the decorative pattern P22 has been prepared.
The movable accessory composed of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 and the logo accessory 7 is a movable accessory for the jackpot finalizing effect, and is used for the effect when the decorative symbols P22 are aligned as described above. When the object moves to the front of the image display unit 114, the jackpot is determined.
This jackpot finalizing effect is subjected to motion control processing by the CPU of the lamp control board 150 for the movement of the movable accessory, and the effect image P51 associated with the jackpot finalizing effect is subjected to image output control processing by the overall CPU 141. Production contents belonging to
As another jackpot finalizing effect executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is a jackpot finalizing sound effect consisting of a jackpot finalizing light emission pattern by a light emitting element and a jackpot finalizing sound by voice, and this jackpot finalizing sound effect starts a variable effect It is an effect that is executed at a plurality of points after the change effect is stopped and displayed.

Next, an effect in the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state when shifting to the special effect mode will be described as an effect based on the time point of arrow A in FIG.
FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display image in the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the normal performance mode. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display image in the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the special effect mode.
In the following description, the images used to produce the jackpot gaming state are collectively referred to as “jackpot gaming images”. The jackpot game image includes a round display image P61, an information image P62, a lively image P63, and a game effect image P64. These images will be specifically described later.

First, for comparison, a jackpot game image in the normal effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 54 shows an example in which there is a time reduction per 8R.
As shown in FIG. 54, a round display image P61 for displaying the number of rounds in each round is displayed. Here, the round display images P61 displayed as “Round 1” to “Round 8” are sequentially displayed for each round.

  By winning the jackpot, the opening is displayed first. In the example of FIG. 54, “Right-handed!” Is used in order to inform the player that the lottery result is a big hit by the characters “Big jackpot!” And that a game ball will be fired toward the right half of the game area 10. The information image P62 informing the instruction information “is displayed.

  Then, from round 1 to round 3, an effect is made using a lively image P63 having a content that enlivens the big hit. In the example of FIG. 54, the lively image P63 displays a message celebrating the jackpot by the character.

  In addition, from round 4 to round 7, a game is executed in which the type of jackpot is notified. This game is played using the game effect image P64. For example, the game effect image P64 displays “challenge chance” in the round 4 and notifies that the game will be started. In addition, the game effect image P64 displays the message “Press the button to clear it!” In round 5, and in the present embodiment, the explanation is made that the game is played by pressing the effect button 26 (see FIG. 1). I do. Then, the game effect image P64 causes the game to be actually played in round 6. Further, the game effect image P64 informs that, in this example, the game effect image P64 is “a big hit where a short-time gaming state occurs” by a display such as “determined short-time”.

Then, in the final round 8, an information image P62 is displayed that clearly indicates the shift to the time-saving mode in which the time-saving gaming state is entered after the end of the big hit game.
The ending information image P62 includes a jackpot end notification information image for notifying that the jackpot game is ended, and a CI (corporate identity) such as the manufacturer name or manufacturer name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 following this information. ) It is composed of a display information image and a card return promotion display information image for prompting the player to return the card following this information.

  When the ending effect ends, the jackpot effect ends. When the special effect mode is in effect even after the jackpot effect ends, the divided area display shown in FIG.

[If you are in a jackpot game when you are in special performance mode]
On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed when the mode is shifted to the special effect mode, the special effect images such as the performance announcement effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48 are displayed on the display screen 114a.
Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot effect is performed when shifting to the special effect mode, a specific image is displayed among images constituting the jackpot game image according to a predetermined condition. The entire screen 114a is displayed, or the display of a specific image among the images constituting the jackpot game image is omitted. Further, the performance notification effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48 are displayed in a reduced size or the performance notification effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48 as a whole are displayed according to the display mode of the jackpot game image.
Here, among the images constituting the jackpot game image, the condition for selecting a specific image to be displayed or omitted as a whole is, for example, an image including information that affects the number of balls for the player (right Whether it is a hitting notification image or the like, or an image including information that gives an accent to the game or information indicating that the game state is changed (a time-decision game effect, opening, ending image, etc. during a big hit) Set based on.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display image when the game state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the special effect mode.
FIG. 55 shows a case where, for example, a big hit (long win) gaming state is achieved when the special effect mode is entered, and a big hit (long win) effect is performed.

First, in the opening effect, the information image P62 informs that the lottery result is a big hit with the characters “big hit !!”. Further, the information image P62 presents “right-handed” information to inform the player that a game ball is to be launched toward the right half side of the game area 10.
These opening effect information images P62 are in a big hit gaming state, the big winning opening 13 is opened, and a game ball is launched toward the big winning opening 13 located on the right side of the gaming area 10. It contains information that affects the number of balls that are played by a person. For this reason, the information image P62 is displayed large overall on the display screen 114a. On the other hand, the music performance effect image P48 is reduced and displayed superimposed on the information image P62.
In this opening effect, the type of jackpot or name of the jackpot that has occurred may be displayed.

  Note that if the transition to the special effect mode has not been made yet before the opening effect is started (the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect has not been executed), the opening effect shown in FIG. 54 is displayed.

  Subsequent to the opening effect, during the long open round effect, the mid-round display image P61 is displayed in each round. The round display image P61 indicates the number of rounds that the special winning opening 13 opens, and includes information that influences the number of balls to be played by the player. Accordingly, the round display image P61 is displayed on the display screen 114a.

However, in rounds 1 to 3 during the long opening round effect, the boost image P63 (see FIG. 54) that excites the jackpot displayed in the normal effect mode is not displayed. The player recognizes that the game has already shifted to the jackpot gaming state due to the opening effect, and can directly confirm that the round display image P61 and the big winning opening 13 are opened for a certain period of time. For this reason, the smashing image P63 that simply raises the jackpot does not include information that influences the number of balls for the player.
That is, it is considered that the display priority of the lively image P63 is lower than that of other jackpot game images. Therefore, in this embodiment, the display of the raised image P63 is omitted. At this time, conversely, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed large overall on the display screen 114a.

When the long opening round effect is not started yet, the transition to the special effect mode has not yet been made (when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is not executed), each long opening round shown in FIG. Each long open round effect is displayed.
In addition, when a transition is made to a special effect mode during a certain long open round effect (when a performance announcement effect or a music performance effect is executed), the long open round effect shown in FIG. 55 is changed from the start timing of the next long open round effect. Switch.

  In addition, the game effect image P64 (promotion effect image) in the “challenge chance” game effect as the promotion effect performed from round 4 to round 7 in the long open round effect and the short time state in round 8 are notified. The information image P62 (short time notification effect image) is considered to include information that influences the number of balls for the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game effect image P64 and the information image P62 are displayed entirely on the display screen 114a. On the other hand, the music performance effect image P48 is reduced and displayed superimposed on the game effect image P64.

When the “Challenge Chance” game production is not started yet, the transition to the special production mode has not yet been made (the performance announcement production or the music performance production has not been executed), and the “Challenge Chance” shown in FIG. A game effect is displayed.
In addition, when a transition is made to the special effect mode during the “challenge chance” game effect in a long open round (the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is executed), from the start timing of the next long open round effect, FIG. Switch to “Challenge Chance” game production in the long open round shown in.

After the final round 8, the jackpot end notification information image for notifying the end of the jackpot game, and the CI (corporate name) of the manufacturer or distributor of the pachinko gaming machine 1 following this information Identity) An ending information image P62 composed of a display information image and a card return promotion display information image for prompting the player to return the card following this information is displayed in the entire area of the display screen 114a.
The information image P62 of the ending effect informs the player of the change of the gaming state in which the jackpot gaming state is terminated and the subsequent gaming state (time-short gaming state (or non-time-short gaming state)) is notified to the player. And includes information for impressing the maker of the CI display to the player, and information for preventing card theft such as a card return promotion display, which is highly important for both the player and the maker. Since it is information, the music performance effect image P48 is not displayed.

  After the jackpot gaming state is finished (after the ending is finished), the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the upper area A1, and the decorative design P22 is displayed in the lower area A2.

  Note that if the transition to the special effect mode has not yet been made before the ending effect is started (the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect has not been executed), the ending effect shown in FIG. 54 is displayed.

  In addition, in FIG. 55, when the special performance mode is entered in the middle of a certain round and the performance announcement production which is the special production is started, the performance announcement production is displayed in the entire area (rounds 1 to 3) or divided into areas ( There are two methods for displaying in rounds 4-8.

  The first method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 receives the round start command related to the next round transmitted from the main CPU 101, and the timing at which the general CPU 141 receives the during-round production start command transmitted from the sub CPU 131. A method of shifting from the entire area display to the area division display (a method based on a round start command transmitted from the main CPU 101).

The second method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 has received the round end command related to the current round transmitted from the main CPU 101 and the timing at which the overall CPU 141 has received the in-round effect end command transmitted from the sub CPU 131. A method of shifting from the entire area display to the area division display (a method based on a round end command transmitted from the main CPU 101).
By using any of these methods, if the special performance mode is entered in the middle of a round and the performance announcement performance is started as a special performance, the performance announcement performance is displayed in the whole area display or the area division display after the round ends. Can do.
As described above, when a special performance mode is entered in the middle of a certain round, and the performance announcement performance that is a special performance is started, the performance announcement performance is displayed in the entire area (rounds 1 to 3) or divided into areas (round) after this round. The timing displayed in 4 to 8) is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 has received a new command transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the end of the round.

  Also, in FIG. 55, when the special effect mode ends in the middle of a certain round and becomes the normal effect mode, there are three methods for displaying the jackpot game image in the normal effect mode in the whole area display.

  The first method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 receives the round start command related to the next round transmitted from the main CPU 101, and the timing at which the general CPU 141 receives the during-round production start command transmitted from the sub CPU 131. A method of displaying the entire area of the jackpot game image in the normal effect mode (a method based on a round start command transmitted from the main CPU 101).

  The second method is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 has received the round end command related to the current round transmitted from the main CPU 101 and the timing at which the overall CPU 141 has received the in-round effect end command transmitted from the sub CPU 131. A method of displaying the entire jackpot game image in the normal effect mode (a method based on a round end command transmitted from the main CPU 101).

The third method is based on the timing at which the overall CPU 141 receives the in-round production end command transmitted from the sub CPU 131 based on the reception of the round end command related to the current round transmitted from the main CPU 101. A method of displaying the entire jackpot game image in the normal effect mode (a method based on a round end command transmitted from the main CPU 101).
By using any one of these methods, when the special effect mode ends in the middle of a certain round and becomes the normal effect mode, the jackpot game image in the normal effect mode can be displayed in the entire area display.

As another method, the jackpot effect ends when the ending effect of FIG. 55 ends, but when the special effect ends before the jackpot effect ends, the hold stored until the special effect ends. If there is a memory (or a hold memory stored until the end of the jackpot effect), the special effect mode is extended until the variable effects of all the stored memories are completed, and the special effect specific to the extended special effect mode is used. A second special effect may be executed. As the second special effect, for example, when the variable effect is a variable effect that is a big hit, a special jackpot finalizing effect different from the normal jackpot finalizing effect is performed, or a mini game unrelated to the game is performed. Also good. By doing in this way, gameability can be improved.
In this case, when the transition to the normal effect mode is made, the transition may be made based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command for the last variation effect in the extended special effect mode, or the next change You may make it transfer based on having received the start command.

  As described above, when the special effect mode ends in the middle of a round and becomes the normal effect mode, when the jackpot game image in the normal effect mode is displayed in the entire area display, the timing for displaying in the entire area display is special. This is based on the fact that the sub CPU 131 has received a new command transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the effect mode has ended.

  Here, in the special effect mode shown in FIG. 55, when a big hit (long hit) occurs when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is performed, and in the special effect mode not shown in FIG. When a short hit occurs when a performance announcement effect or a music performance effect is being performed, the display mode of the effect is arranged.

  [1] The opening effect is performed during the opening of the long hit effect, and this opening effect includes the display of the effect image for informing the type of jackpot and the effect image for urging to the right. For this reason, when performing the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect during the opening effect, the opening effect image or the music performance effect image is reduced while displaying the opening effect image in the upper area A1. Overlay the image.

  [2] During the long-opening round production of the long-performing production, the production during the round is performed. When this production during the round is a normal production during the round that does not include the promotion production, the performance announcement is made during the long-opening round game. The effect image or the music performance effect image is displayed large in the entire area, and the image of the effect during the round is superimposed on one of these two images.

  [3] When the production during the long open round includes the promotion production, since the importance of the production during the round is higher than the production during the round not including the promotion production, in the promotion production execution round during the long opening round game, While the round effect is displayed large in the entire area, the performance notification effect image or the music performance effect image is reduced and superimposed.

  [4] When the effect during the long open round includes the time notification effect, the effect during the round is higher than the effect during the round that does not include the time notification effect. , The effect during the round is displayed large in the entire area, and the performance notification effect image or the music performance effect image is reduced and superimposed.

  [5] During the short opening round production of the short hit game, as a short hit production, a short rushing production effect is performed, in which the player's expectation for entering the short-time gaming state is envisaged. Because it is highly important for the player, during the short open round game, the performance announcement effect image or the music performance effect image is reduced and the time entry is reduced while the image of the time entry entry effect is displayed in the upper area A1. Superimposed display on the image of the effect.

  [6] During the ending production, since the ending production performed during the ending is highly important for the player and the manufacturer, the ending production image is displayed in the entire area, and the performance announcement production image or the music performance production is displayed. The image is not displayed.

  As described above, when shifting to the jackpot game state in the special effect mode, basically, the jackpot game image is displayed as a whole and the special effect image is reduced and displayed. Further, depending on the contents of the images constituting the jackpot game image, the display of a part of the image constituting the jackpot game image to be displayed when shifting to the jackpot game state in the normal performance mode is omitted, and the special effect image is displayed as a whole. To be displayed. Thereby, the player can enjoy both the game effect and the special effect as appropriate. In addition, since necessary information for the game using the game ball is appropriately notified, the performance announcement performance and the music performance performance will not interfere with the game, so the player plays the game smoothly. be able to.

  In the above description, the jackpot effect is described as an example of the game effect executed in the special effect mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to a case where a game effect such as a probability change notification that is performed in the state of transitioning to the special effect mode is performed. That is, for example, when performing a game effect such as performing a mini game and notifying the probability variation state according to the result of the game, the special effect image is reduced and displayed while the game effect screen is displayed as a whole. In addition, in the state where the game and the probability change notification are not performed, the special effect is displayed as a whole. Even with this configuration, the player can appropriately enjoy both the game effect and the special effect.

Note that the information image P62 or the game effect image P64 is entirely displayed on the display screen 114a in the opening and the rounds 4 to 8 of FIG. On the other hand, the music performance effect image P48 has been reduced and superimposed on the game effect image P64, but it may be less interesting for a player who wants to enjoy a promotion effect or the like. During the promotion effect, the music performance effect (or performance announcement effect) may not be executed (interrupted), or an image may not be displayed.
As a result, the interest of the player who wants to enjoy promotion and the like is not reduced.

[Normal production control processing by image sound control board 140]
56 to 60 are detailed flowcharts of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. In this normal effect control process, setting information related to the normal effect is set in the control RAM 145. The display of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is controlled based on the display list for the main liquid crystal created based on the setting information, thereby realizing a normal effect.

  Subsequent to the music performance production start process in step S2500, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not a command from the production control board 130 has been received as shown in FIG. 56 (step S2601). If it is determined that a command has not been received (step S2601: NO), the process proceeds to a music performance effect end process in step S2700.

  When determining that the command from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S2601: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is a customer waiting effect start command (step S2602). If it is determined that the command is a customer waiting effect start command (step S2602: YES), setting information for starting display of the predetermined customer waiting effect image is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2603). However, when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is executed at the timing when the image sound control board 140 receives the customer waiting effect start command, the overall CPU 141 changes to the customer waiting effect after the music performance effect ends. Set the setting information.

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where a predetermined | prescribed customer waiting effect was performed, every time the first music performance effect of a new music is performed like a long hit game opening effect and an ending effect, it becomes a customer waiting effect. The video used may be changed as appropriate based on the latest song, or the latest song may be output from the speaker 24 during the customer waiting effect. Thereby, before the player starts the game, it is possible to grasp to what new music the performance of the music performance has been performed or to predict the new music to be performed next.

  If the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2603 or determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a customer command (step S2602: NO), the command from the effect control board 130 is a hold display command. It is determined whether or not (step S2605).

  The variation effect in the present embodiment is performed using the entire area when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is not performed, and is performed using the lower region A2 when these effects are performed. Therefore, the hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is put on hold is displayed in the entire area when these effects are not performed (see, for example, FIG. 51A), and these effects are performed. When displayed, it is displayed in the lower area A2 (see, for example, FIGS. 51A-2 and A-3). Further, since the special symbol determination is not performed during the special game, the hold display image is not displayed during the special game (see, for example, FIG. 55). In order to realize such display control of the hold display image, the overall CPU 141 executes the following processing.

  That is, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is a hold display command (step S2605: YES), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 142, determines whether or not the performance announcement effect is being performed. (Step S2606). If it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (step 2606: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (step S2607). If it is determined that the music performance effect is not being executed (step S2607: NO), setting information for additionally displaying the hold display image in the entire area is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2608).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the performance announcement effect is being executed (step S2606: YES), or if it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (step S2607: YES), for example, from the effect control board 130 Based on the reception status of the command related to the special game, the elapsed time since the command was received, etc., it is determined whether or not the special game is being played (step S2609).

  When determining that the special game is not being played (step S2609: NO), the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for additionally displaying the hold display image in the lower area A2 in the control RAM 145 (step S2610).

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2608, executes the process of step S2610, determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a hold display command (step S2605: NO), or during special game Is determined (step S2609: YES), it is determined whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a variable effect start command (step S2612).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is a change effect start command (step S2612: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the performance performance of the music performance has never been performed. (Step S2613). Specifically, whether or not the current date and time indicated by the RTC information is the date and time before the first song performance stage date and the first song performance stage time of the new song A defined in the performance management table (see FIG. 40). It is determined whether or not the performance is in an unperformed state.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the performance has not been performed (step S2613: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets a default table in the control RAM 145 as a display list creation table (step S2614).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not in the unperformed state (step S2613: NO), it determines whether or not the performance announcement effect is being executed (step S2615), similarly to the process of step S2606. If it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (step S2615: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (step S2616), as in the process of step S2607.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the performance announcement effect is being executed (step S2615: YES), or if it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (step S2616: YES), the display list creation table uses a dot. An effect table is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2617).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect is not being executed (step S2616: NO), the overall CPU 141 identifies a new song used for the previous music performance effect (step S2618). For example, if the new song information indicating the new song used for the performance of the music is stored in the control RAM 145 and the new song information is updated every time the performance of the music is performed, it is used for the previous performance of the music. Can be identified.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2618, the overall CPU 141 sets a main table corresponding to the specified new song in the control RAM 145 (step S2619). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 37, in the present embodiment, twelve main tables of the new song A main table to the new song L main table are stored in the control ROM 144, so these twelve main tables are stored. The main table of the new song identified by the processing in step S2618 is selected and set in the control RAM 145.

  The overall CPU 141 acquires a random number for selection when the process of step S2617 is executed, when the process of step S2614 is executed, or when the process of step S2619 is executed (step S2620). Specifically, the image acoustic control board 140 performs a random number update process for updating the selection random number or the like at a predetermined cycle shorter than the interrupt process, and the overall CPU 141 performs effect control on the selection random number. The value at the time of receiving the change effect start command from the board 130 is acquired.

  Then, the overall CPU 141 determines the display content in the normal effect based on the acquired selection random number and the set display list creation table (step S2621). In the display list creation table, a special symbol variation pattern and a plurality of effect patterns of normal effects are associated with each other. Then, for each of the plurality of effect patterns of the normal effect, the type of image data used as a material when generating images of each effect (decorative symbol effect, background image effect, character effect, etc.) constituting the normal effect, A random number for selection is associated. The general CPU 141 first analyzes the change effect start command and specifies the effect pattern of the current normal effect. Then, the type of image data used for the normal effect is determined by specifying the type of image data corresponding to the random number for selection acquired in step S2620 for the specified effect pattern. The types of image data include default, new song A, new song B, new song C, new song D, new song E, new song F, new song G, new song H, new song I, new song J, new song K, and new song L. For example, when default is selected as the type of image data for the background image effect, a default background image generated using the default image data is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and a new song A is selected. The new song A background image generated using the image data of the new song A is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  The overall CPU 141 sets setting information for starting display of the game effect image having the display content determined in the process of step S2621 in the control RAM 145 (step S2622). The display list generated based on the setting information is set in the display list storage area 1491, so that the changing effect as the normal effect using the main liquid crystal display device 5 is started.

  In this way, the overall CPU 141 causes the main liquid crystal display device 5 to perform a normal effect when the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. At that time, it is determined which music performance effect of the new song has been executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5, and a display list creation table is selected based on the determination result.

  Here, a change in the background image during the normal production triggered by each display list creation table and the music performance production will be described. Here, the change in the normal effect will be described by taking an example of the change in the background image triggered by the music performance effect. However, the character displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, the BGM output from the speaker 24, etc. It changes with the performance of music performance.

  FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram of a default table. As illustrated in FIG. 61, the default table defines two types of image data for generating a background image: a first default background and a second default background. For example, when the selection random number is 100, in the default table, 50 different selection random numbers are assigned to these two types of backgrounds. For this reason, in the said step S2621, it selects in the ratio of 50%, respectively. This default table is used from the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced to the pachinko hall until the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, and thereafter, it is not used even in the state where all songs are released.

  FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram of the new song A main table. As illustrated in FIG. 62, the new song A main table defines three types of image data for generating a background image: a first default background, a second default background, and a new song A background. . For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song A main table, 25 selection random numbers are assigned to the first default background, and 25 similarly to the second default background. Random numbers for selection are assigned, and 50 random numbers for selection are assigned to the background of the new song A. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song A background is selected at a rate of 50%, the second default background is selected at a rate of 25%, and the first default background is selected at the rate of 25%.

  The new song A main table is used for one week from the start of the first song performance effect of the new song A to the start of the first song performance effect of the new song B before shifting to the open state of all songs. When the first song performance of the new song A is performed, the background image of the new song A is most likely to appear at 50% for one week, so the player can produce the new song A even after the song performance of the new song A is performed. Can also enjoy the performance of the new song A after the first time.

  The new song A main table is different from the default table in that the new song A background can be newly selected. Here, for example, if the selection ratios of the first default background, the second default background, and the new song A background are set to be the same, the appearance rate of the normal effect based on the new song A is lowered. As a result, the opportunity for the player to enjoy the normal performance based on the new song A is reduced, and it is clearly recognized that the normal production has been switched by the first song performance production of the new song A (the production related to the new song A has been newly added). There is a possibility of disappearing. Thus, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of the new song A background is increased by lowering the selection rates of the first default background and the second default background compared to the default table.

  As is clear from the above description, the general CPU 141 selects the default table until the first music performance effect of the new song A is performed, and uses the normal effect data stored in the CGROM 148 as the normal effect. The main liquid crystal display device 5 is caused to execute. On the other hand, after the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, the selection rates of the first default background and the second default background are set lower than the default table, and instead, the selection rate of the new song A background. The new song A main table set with the highest is selected. Thereby, the main liquid crystal display device 5 is caused to execute the effect using the special effect data (here, the image data of the new song A) stored in the CGROM 148 as the normal effect.

  FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram of the new song B main table. As illustrated in FIG. 63, the new song B main table defines three types of image data for generating a background image: a second default background, a new song A background, and a new song B background. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song B main table, 15 selection random numbers are assigned to the second default background, and 35 selections are made for the new song A background. A random number for use is assigned, and 50 selection random numbers are assigned to the background of the new song B. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 50%, the new song A background is selected at a rate of 35%, and the second default background is selected at a rate of 15%.

  This new song B main table is used for one week from the start of the first song performance effect of the new song B until the start of the first song performance effect of the new song C before the transition to the all songs open state. When the initial performance performance of the new song B is performed, the background image of the new song B is most likely to appear at 50%, so that the player can enjoy the performance of the new song B even after the performance performance of the new song B is performed. In addition, before the transition to the state in which all songs are released, it is possible to further enjoy the performance performance of the new song B after the first time.

  The new song B main table is different from the new song A main table in that the new song B can be newly selected and the first default background is excluded. Here, if the first default background is not excluded, the selectable backgrounds are the first default background, the second default background, the new song A background, and the new song B background. The problem arises that the background selection rate cannot be set too high. Further, when trying to further increase the selection rate of the new song B background, there arises a problem that not only the default background but also the selection rate of the new song A background must be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the new song B is excluded by excluding the first default background included in the new song A main table (the selection rate is “0”) and lowering the selection rate of the second default background. While the background selection rate is increased, the selection rate of the new song A background is suppressed from being unnecessarily low.

  FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram of the new song C main table. As illustrated in FIG. 64, in the new song C main table, three types of new song A background, new song B background, and new song C background are defined as types of image data for generating a background image. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song C main table, 20 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and 30 selection random numbers are used for the new song B background. A random number is assigned, and 50 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 50%, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 30%, and the new song A background is selected at a rate of 20%.

  This new song C main table is used for one week from the start of the first song performance performance of the new song C to the start of the first song performance performance of the new song D before the transition to the all songs release state. When the first song performance performance of the new song C is performed, the background image of the new song C is most likely to appear at 50%. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance of the new song C even after the performance performance of the new song C is performed. In addition, before the transition to the state in which all songs are released, it is possible to further enjoy the performance performance of the new song C after the first time.

  The new song C main table is different from the new song B main table in that the new song C is newly selectable and the second default background is excluded. That is, the second default background is excluded in order to set the appearance rate of the new song C background image to the highest and set the appearance rate of the new song A and the new song B as high as possible. In other words, when the new song C main table is used, the normal effect data stored in the CGROM 148 is not used, and only the special effect data is used.

  FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram of the new song D main table. As illustrated in FIG. 65, in the new song D main table, four types of new song A background, new song B background, new song C background, and new song D background are defined as types of image data for generating a background image. ing. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song D main table, 10 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and 20 selections are used for the new song B background. Random numbers are assigned, 30 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background, and 40 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song D background. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song D background is selected at a rate of 40%, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 30%, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 20%, and the remaining 10% rate. The new song A background is selected.

  The new song D main table is used for one week from when the first song performance effect of the new song D is started to when the first song performance effect of the new song E is started before shifting to the open state of all songs. When the first song performance production of the new song D is performed, the background image of the new song C is most likely to appear at 40%. Therefore, the player can enjoy the production of the new song D even after the song performance production of the new song D is performed. In addition, before the transition to the state in which all songs are released, it is possible to further enjoy the performance performance of the new song D after the first time.

  The new song D main table is different from the new song C main table in that the new song D can be newly selected. In addition, when comparing by the selection rate, the selection rate of the first default background and the second default background is set to 0% in both main tables, so that the appearance rate of the default background is lowered in the new song D main table. Instead of the method, the selection rate of the new song D is set to the highest value by lowering the selection rate of the previously performed new song (here, new songs A to C). The same applies to the tables after the new song E main table.

  FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram of the new song E main table. As illustrated in FIG. 66, in the new song E main table, 5 types of new song A background, new song B background, new song C background, new song D background, and new song E background are used as the types of image data for generating the background image. The type is specified. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song E main table, five selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and ten selection random numbers are used for the new song B background. Random numbers are assigned, 20 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background, 25 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song D background, and 40 selections are assigned to the new song E background. Random numbers are assigned. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song E background is selected at a rate of 40%, the new song D background is selected at a rate of 25%, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 20%, and the rate of 10%. The new song B background is selected and the remaining 5% of the new song A background is selected.

  FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram of the new song L main table. As illustrated in FIG. 67, in the new song L main table, twelve types of new song A background to new song L background are defined, and as with the other main tables, the selection rate of the latest song is the highest. A random number for selection is assigned (20% in the example shown in FIG. 67). In this new song L main table, the background images of all new songs used for the performance of the music performance are defined, so until one week has passed since the first performance performance of the new song L was performed, the player Can enjoy the normal effects of all new songs, centering on the normal effects using the new song L.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for describing a change in image data used for drawing a background image. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for describing changes in the appearance rate of various background images. In FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, “◎” indicates the background that is most likely to appear, “◯” indicates the background that may not appear to have the highest appearance rate, and “×” indicates the possibility that it may appear. There is no background.

  From the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced to the pachinko hall until one week elapses, a display list is created using the default table (see FIG. 61) described above for the normal performance. For this reason, the background image that appears in the normal performance until one week has passed since the introduction is the first default background or the second default background. In the second week of introduction, a display list is created using the above-described new song A main table (see FIG. 62). For this reason, in the normal production in the second week of introduction, the new song A background is most likely to appear, the second default background is likely to appear next, and the first default background is least likely to appear.

  In the third week of introduction, a display list is created using the new song B main table (see FIG. 63). For this reason, in the normal performance in the third week of introduction, the new song B background appears newly at the highest appearance rate, and the first default background does not appear. In the fourth week after introduction, a display list is created using the new song C main table (see FIG. 64). For this reason, in the normal performance in the fourth week of introduction, the new song C background newly appears at the highest appearance rate, and the second default background also does not appear. Thereafter, every time one week elapses, a background image of a new new song is added and the number of types of background images finally becomes twelve. Therefore, variations of normal effects increase.

  Up to this point, the background image in the normal performance before the release of the entire song has been described. However, when the release of the entire song is performed, the type of the new song that is performed every hour based on the power-on is the performance of the song performance. It is changed every time it is performed (see FIG. 43). For this reason, the selection switching of the display list creation table was performed every week before the release of all songs, but the selection switching of the display list creation table is performed every hour when the release of all songs is performed. become.

  By the way, in the main table (for example, the new song L main table and the new song K main table) corresponding to the new song used for the last song performance production before all songs are released, the new song used for the initial song performance production. The appearance rate of the background image of the initial new song is extremely low compared to the main table corresponding to (new song A main table and table on the new song B side) (see, for example, FIGS. 62 and 67). For this reason, for example, during the first week after the performance of the first song performance of the new song L, the background images of the new song A and the new song B are very unlikely to appear, and some players cannot see these background images. It is also possible.

  On the other hand, in the all-music release state, the selection switching of the display list creation table is performed every hour. For this reason, for example, the new song A main table and the new song B main table are used. As a result, it is possible to enjoy a background image that has been limited to only one hour of the day, but has been less visible.

  By the way, as described above, the time required for one variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is longer than the start time of the performance announcement effect, and the variation effect develops before the start time of the music performance effect. In this case, the performance effect image P47 is displayed in the entire region display at the development timing, and the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed in a reduced size and superimposed on the entire region display (see FIG. 51B). In addition, if the time required for one variation production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is longer than the start time of the performance announcement production, and the variation production does not develop before the start time of the music performance production, the performance The announcement effect is not performed, and at the timing when the musical performance performance is started, the variation performance image remains in the entire area display, and the musical performance performance image P48 is displayed in a reduced size and superimposed on the entire area display (FIG. 51 (C )reference). In order to realize such control, the overall CPU 141 executes the following processing regarding the variation effect.

  That is, when the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2622 or determines that the change effect start command has not been received (step S2612: NO), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a development start flag indicating whether or not to start the performance announcement effect at the development timing is set to “ON” (step S2626). If it is determined that the development start flag is set to “ON” (step S2626: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the development timing, as in the process of step S2419 (see FIG. 45). (Step S2627).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the development (separation) timing (step S2627: YES), it sets setting information for reducing the display of the special effect image in the control RAM 145 (step S2628). The display list generated based on the setting information set in step S2628 is set in the display list storage area 1491, whereby the drawing process as described above with reference to FIG. 15 is performed.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2628, determines that the development start flag is not set to “ON” (step S2626: NO), or determines that it is not the development timing (step S2627). : NO), for example, based on whether or not the music performance flag is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the music performance effect (step S2629).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start timing of the music performance effect (step S2629: YES), it is determined whether or not the prohibition flag indicating whether or not to prohibit the performance announcement effect is set to “ON”. Determination is made (step S2630). Here, when it is determined that the prohibition flag is set to “ON” (step S2630: YES), the setting information for reducing the display of the special effect image is controlled as in the process of step S2628. It is set in the RAM 145 (step S2631). Thereby, as illustrated in FIG. 51C, the special effect image is reduced and displayed simultaneously with the start of the music performance effect.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2631, determines that it is not the start timing of the music performance effect (step S2629: NO), or determines that the prohibition flag is not set to “ON” (step) S2630: NO), it is determined whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a variation effect end command (step S2633). If it is determined that the command is a variation effect end command (step S2633: YES), the variation effect being executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 is terminated (step S2634).

  By the way, when the after-end start flag indicating whether or not to start the performance announcement effect after the variation effect accompanying the variation display of this special symbol is ended is set to “ON”, the variation display of this special symbol It is necessary to start the performance announcement after the variation production accompanying the end. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol determination is not suspended, the variation of the special symbol next to the variation display of the special symbol of this time is not immediately started. At the timing when the display ends, the performance announcement effect is started, and at the same time, the variable effect image including the decorative symbols in the stopped display state is displayed in dots in the lower area A2. In order to realize such control, the overall CPU 141 executes the following processing regarding the variation effect.

  That is, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the after-start flag is set to “ON” following the process of step S2634 (step S2635). Here, when it is determined that the start flag after the end is set to “ON” (step S2635: YES), the first special symbol determination is suspended as in the process of step S2422 (see FIG. 45). It is determined whether or not there is (step S2636). Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is not suspended (step S2636: NO), the control RAM 145 displays setting information for dot display of the variable effect image including the stopped decorative symbol in the lower area A2. (Step S2637).

  When the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a variable effect end command when the process of step S2737 is executed (step S2633: NO), the after-start flag is set to “ON”. When it is determined that there is not (step S2635: NO), or when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is suspended (step S2636: YES), the following processing is executed regarding the winning effect relating to the long win game.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 58, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is an opening effect start command related to a long hit game (step S2640). Here, if it is determined that the command is an opening effect start command (step S2640: YES), is it in an unperformed state in which a music performance effect has never been performed as in the process of step S2613 (see FIG. 57)? It is determined whether or not (step S2641). Here, when it is determined that the performance has not been performed (step S2641: YES), a default opening effect image is selected (step S2642), and conversely, when it is determined that the performance has not been performed (step S2641: NO). Then, an opening effect image based on the new song used for the last music performance effect is selected (step S2643).

Next, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for starting display of the entire area of the opening effect image selected in step S2642 or step S2643 in the control RAM 145 (step S2644).
Next, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the performance announcement effect is being executed (step S2645), similarly to the process of step S2606 (see FIG. 57). Here, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (step S2645: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed, as in the process of step S2607 (see FIG. 57). (Step S2646).

If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect is not being executed (step S2646: NO), the overall CPU 141 proceeds to the process of step S2649. On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is being executed (step S2645: YES), or when it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (step S2646: YES), the special effect image display is reduced. Setting information is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2647).
Thereby, as illustrated in the opening display of FIG. 55, the opening effect image is displayed in the entire area, and the special effect image (music performance effect image P48) is reduced and displayed superimposed on the opening effect image. Become.

Subsequently, when the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not an opening command (step S2640: NO), the command from the effect control board 130 is an in-round effect start command related to the long hit game. It is determined whether or not (step S2649).
The determination process in step S2649 may be replaced with “determine whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is an in-round effect end command (step S2649)”.
Here, when it is determined that the command is a production start command during a round (step S2649: YES), it is determined whether or not the performance announcement production is being executed (step S2649-1), as in the process of step S2645. . Here, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (step S2649-1: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (step S2649) as in the process of step S2646. -2).

When determining that the music performance effect is not being executed (step S2649-2: NO), the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for displaying the effect image during the round according to the number of rounds in the control RAM 145. (Step S2650).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is being executed (step S2649-1: YES), or when it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (step S2649-2: YES), a round effect start command It is determined whether the number of rounds indicated by 4 is 4-8 (step S2649-3). When it is determined that the number of rounds is 4 to 8 (step S2649-3: YES), setting information for reducing the display of the special effect image is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2649-4).
Thereby, as illustrated in the R4 display to R8 display of FIG. 55, the challenge chance game effect image that is a game effect image, the time-determined (or non-time-determined) image, and the time-lapse entry image are displayed in the entire area. At the same time, the special effect image (music performance effect image P48) is reduced and displayed in a superimposed manner on these game effect images.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2649-4, step S2649-5, or step S2650 when it is determined that the command from the effect control board 130 is not an effect start command during round (step S2649: NO). In this case, it is determined whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a music selection screen display command (step S2651). If it is determined that the command is a music selection screen display command (step S2651: YES), the latest music is specified (step S2652). For example, if the new song information indicating the new song used for the performance of the music is stored in the control RAM 145 and the new song information is updated every time the performance of the music is performed, it is used for the previous performance of the music. It is possible to specify a new song (latest song) that has been made.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2652, the overall CPU 141 displays setting information for displaying a music selection screen for selecting all new songs that have already been performed including the latest music specified in the process of step S2652. (Step S2653).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a music selection screen display command (step S2651: NO), or if the process of step S2653 is executed, the command music playback command from the effect control board 130 It is determined whether or not (step S2654). If it is determined that the command is a music playback command (step S2654: YES), setting information for starting the music of the selected new music is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2655). Note that which piece of music is selected may be specified based on an operation command that is set in the sub-RAM 133 in the process of step S12 (see FIG. 33) and transmitted from the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S13. Is possible.

  When the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a music reproduction command (step S2654: NO), or when the process of step S2655 is executed, as shown in FIG. 60, the effect control board It is determined whether or not the command from 130 is an ending effect start command related to the long hit game (step S2658). If it is determined that the command is an ending effect start command (step S2658: YES), setting information for starting display of the entire region of the ending effect image based on the same new song used for the opening effect is stored in the control RAM 145. It is set (step S2659).

Next, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the performance announcement effect is being executed (step S2659-1) in the same manner as the process of step S2649-1. If it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (step S2659-1: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (step S2649-2) (step S2649-2). Step S2659-2).
If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect is not being executed (step S2659-2: NO), the overall CPU 141 proceeds to the process of step S2660.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is being executed (step S2659-1: YES), or when it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (step S2659-2: YES), the special effect image is displayed. Setting information for reducing the display is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2659-3).
Thereby, as illustrated in the ending display of FIG. 55, the ending effect image which is a game effect image is displayed in the entire area, and the special effect image (music performance effect image P48) is reduced and superimposed on the ending effect image. Will be displayed.
If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not an ending effect start command (step S2658: NO), or executes the process of step S2659-2 or step S2659-3, the short hit game The following processing is executed with respect to the hit effect related to.

  That is, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a short hit effect start command (step S2660). Here, when it is determined that the command is a short hit effect start command (step S2660: YES), it is determined whether or not the performance is not performed (step S2661), similarly to the process of step S2613. If it is determined that the performance has not been performed (step S2661: YES), a default short win effect image is selected (step S2662). On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance is not in the unperformed state (step S2661: NO), the short hit effect image based on the new song used for the last music performance effect is selected (step S2663).

  When executing the process of step S2662, or when executing the process of step S2663, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the performance announcement effect is being executed (step S2664), similarly to the process of step S2606. If it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (step S2664: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (step S2665) in the same manner as the process of step S2607.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect is not being executed (step S2665: NO), the setting information for starting the entire area display of the short hit effect image selected in the process of step S2662 or the process of step S2663. Is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2666). On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is being executed (step S2664: YES), or when it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (step S2665: YES), the process of step S2662 or the process of step S2663 The setting information for starting the reduced display of the short hit effect image selected in (5) is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2667).

  Next, the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a short hit effect start command (step S2660: NO), executes the process of step S2666, or executes the process of step S2667. In this case, it is determined whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a short hit effect end command (step S2668). Here, if it is determined that the command is a short hit effect end command (step S2668: YES), the short hit effect being executed is ended (step S2669). When the process of step S2669 is performed, or when it is determined that the command from the effect control board 130 is not the short hit effect end command (step S2668: NO), the process is performed in the music performance effect end process of step S2700. It is advanced.

  Although not shown in the detailed flowcharts of the normal effect control process of FIGS. 56 to 60, the unauthorized prize display 1 command or the unauthorized prize display 2 command transmitted by the command transmission process by the sub CPU 131 described above, or When the overall CPU 141 receives either the illegal prize display 3 command or the illegal prize display 4 command, if it is an illegal prize display 1 command, setting information for starting the first start port error display is set. If it is an illegal prize display 2 command, setting information for starting the second start opening error display is set, and if it is an illegal prize display 3 command, setting information for starting the specific prize opening error display is set, If it is an illegal prize display 4 command, setting information for starting the big prize opening error display is set.

[Ending processing of musical performance performance by image sound control board 140]
FIG. 70 is a detailed flowchart of the music performance effect end processing in step S2700 of FIG. Subsequent to the normal performance control process in step S2600, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the music performance effect has reached the time required for the music performance effect, for example, as illustrated in FIG. Based on, it is determined whether or not the music performance effect has ended (step S2701). If it is determined that the music performance performance has not ended (step S2701: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process of step S2800.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect has ended (step S2701: YES), whether or not the music performance effect end processing for returning the game effect image and the customer waiting effect image to the entire area display has been completed. Is determined (step S2702). Here, when it is determined that the end process has not been completed (step S2702: NO), for example, based on whether or not a variable effect start command is received after receiving a customer waiting effect start command from the effect control board 130, It is determined whether or not the customer is waiting (step S2703). If it is determined that the customer is waiting (step S2703: YES), setting information for returning to the normal screen mode is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2704).

  On the other hand, if the general CPU 141 determines that it is not in the customer waiting state (step S2703: NO), for example, based on the reception status of the command related to the special game from the effect control board 130, whether or not the long hit game is in progress Is determined (step S2705). If it is determined that the game is not long hit (step S2705: NO), it is determined whether or not a start command (for example, a variable effect start command) has been received (step S2706). If it is determined that the start command has not been received (step S2706: YES), the process proceeds to the image output control process in step S2800.

  When determining that the start command has been received (step S2706), the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for returning to the normal screen mode in the control RAM 145 (step S2707).

  That is, when the music performance effect is finished and the customer is waiting, the process of step S2704 is performed and immediately returned to the normal screen mode, and when the music performance effect is finished, the customer is not waiting and the special game. If not, for example, the screen is returned to the normal screen mode at the timing when the variation effect is started in response to reception of the variation effect start command.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2707, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the replay flag related to music reproduction is set to “ON” (step S2708). If it is determined that the replay flag is not set to “ON” (step S2708: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process in step S2800.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the replay flag is set to “ON” (step S2708: YES), the overall CPU 141 controls setting information for starting playback of a new song indicated by the song information stored in the control RAM 145. The RAM 145 is set (step S2709). As a result, a new song that has not been played to the end due to the interruption of the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect, despite being selected by the player during the long hit game, is played from the beginning. Then, following the processing of step S2709, the overall CPU 141 sets the replay flag to “OFF” (step S2710).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that a long game is being played (step S2705: YES), based on whether or not an effect start command during the final round is received from the effect control board 130, the start of the last round It is determined whether or not (step S2711). If it is determined that it is before the start of the final round (step S2711: YES), the process proceeds to step S2706. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2707 at the timing when the in-round production start command is received as the start command.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not before the final round (step S2711: NO), for example, whether or not the ending effect has ended based on the elapsed time since the reception of the ending effect start command. Is determined (step S2712). If it is determined that the ending effect has not ended (step S2712: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process in step S2800. Conversely, if it is determined that the ending effect has ended (step S2712: YES), the process proceeds to step S2707.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the performance of the music performance is finished, the main liquid crystal display device 5 informs that the performance of the music performance using the new song (unperformed music) to be performed next is performed. The next song will be announced. For example, when the performance performance of the new song A is finished, the next song notice effect related to the new song B, which is the next unperformed song, is performed. For example, when the performance performance of the new song F is finished, the next song related to the new song G to be performed next is performed. Perform a notice effect. In order to realize such a next song notice effect, when the music performance effect end process is completed, the following process is performed.

  That is, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the music performance effect end processing has been completed (step S2702: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether there is an unperformed song (step S2714). Specifically, with reference to the performance management table (see FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not there is a new song whose first music performance effect date is later than the new song used for the music performance effect performed this time.

  When determining that there is an unperformed song (step S2714: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the next song notice effect has been completed (step S2715). If it is determined that the next song notice effect has not been completed (step S2715: NO), setting information for executing the next song notice effect is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2716). Specifically, the first song performance stage date of each unperformed song is compared, and the new song whose earliest song performance stage date is the first is identified as the new song to be performed next, for example, the title of the identified new song, Setting information for displaying on the main liquid crystal display device 5 an effect image including the number of days remaining until the first music performance effect of the new song is performed is set in the control RAM 145. The title of the new song and the remaining days can be determined based on the information stored in the performance management table and the RTC information.

[Image Output Control Processing by Image Acoustic Control Board 140]
FIG. 71 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step S2800 of FIG. Subsequent to the music performance presentation end process in step S2700, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not setting information regarding the main liquid crystal is stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2801). In the present embodiment, a normal effect (variation effect or winning effect), a performance announcement effect, a music performance effect, a music playback effect, and an error display are performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5, so that in this step S2801, the normal effect Whether or not at least one of setting information for executing the performance, setting information for executing the performance announcement effect, setting information for executing the music performance effect, and setting information for starting the music reproduction is stored Determine whether.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the setting information related to the main liquid crystal is stored (step S2801: YES), the lowermost first layer defined in the stored setting information and the priority management table described above. To determine which image is preferentially displayed based on the priority of each of the uppermost 8th layers, and which output control pattern among the output control patterns 1 to 3 is used to execute image output control Then, it is determined what screen configuration should be constructed, and a display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the determination result (step S2802). The created display list is set in the display list storage area 1491 (step S2803).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2803 or determines that the setting information regarding the main liquid crystal is not stored (step S2801: NO), whether the setting information regarding the sub liquid crystal is stored in the control RAM 145 or not. Is determined (step S2804). In this embodiment, since the notification effect regarding the music performance effect is performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6, it is determined in this step S2804 whether or not setting information for executing the notification effect is stored.

  If it is determined that the setting information related to the sub liquid crystal is stored (step S2804: YES), the overall CPU 141 creates a display list for the sub liquid crystal (step S2805), and the created display list is stored in the display list storage area 1491. It is set (step S2806). When the process of step S2806 is executed, or when it is determined that the setting information regarding the sub liquid crystal is not stored (step S2804: NO), the process proceeds to the audio output control process of step S2900.

[Audio output control processing by the image acoustic control board 140]
FIG. 72 is a detailed flowchart of the audio output control process in step S2900 of FIG. Subsequent to the image output control process in step S2800, the overall CPU 141 performs the following process in order to synchronize the sound output from the speaker 24 with the effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5 according to the image output control process. Run.

That is, for example, based on whether or not the main liquid crystal display list including the change effect start instruction is set in the display list storage area 1491 in the process of step S2803, the overall CPU 141 determines the change effect image related to the change effect. It is determined whether display has been started (step S2901).
Note that in the determination in step S2901, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer specified in the priority management table. Is done.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the display of the variation effect image is started (step S2901: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the variation effect image is displayed in dots in the lower area A2 (step S2902). Here, when it is determined that dots are not displayed (step S2902: NO), that is, when display of the entire area of the variation effect image is started, an audio output related to the variation effect image is output in synchronization with the variation effect image display. The sound DSP 143 is started (step S2903). On the other hand, if it is determined that the display is a dot display (step S2902: YES), the process of step S2903 is performed in order to prioritize the audio output related to the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect performed using the upper area A1. Instead, the process proceeds to step S2904 described later.

The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2903, determines that the display of the variation effect image is not started (step S2901: NO), or determines that the variation effect image is displayed in dots. (Step S2902: YES), it is determined whether or not to start the reduced display of the variable effect image (Step S2904). For example, when the display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the setting information set in the control RAM 145 by the process of step S2628 (see FIG. 58), it is determined that the reduced display is started. .
In the determination in step S2904, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer specified in the priority management table. Is done.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that reduced display of the variation effect image is to be started (step S2904: YES), for example, based on the setting information related to the variation effect set in the control RAM 145, the variation effect is reach or higher. It is determined whether or not (step S2905). And when it determines with it being more than reach (step S2905: YES), ie, when the expectation degree which becomes a big hit is relatively high, the process which lowers | hangs the audio | voice regarding a fluctuation effect image and continues the audio | voice output of a fluctuation effect is carried out. (Step S2906). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not reach or more (step S2905: NO), that is, when the expectation level that is a big hit is relatively low, or when the necessity for audio output is low, the audio DSP 143 outputs audio regarding the fluctuation effect image. Is stopped (step S2907).

When the overall CPU 141 determines not to start the reduced display of the variable effect (step S2904: NO), when the process of step S2906 is executed, or when the process of step S2907 is executed, the performance is performed in the process of step S2803, for example. Based on whether or not the display list for the main liquid crystal including the start instruction of the notice effect is set in the display list storage area 1491, it is determined whether or not the display of the performance notice effect image P47 related to the notice notice effect is started. (Step S2908). Here, when it is determined that the display of the performance announcement effect image P47 is started (step S2908: YES), the sound DSP 143 is started to output the sound related to the performance announcement effect image P47 in synchronization with the display of the performance announcement effect image P47 ( Step S2909).
In the determination in step S2908, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer, which is defined in the priority management table. Is done.

When determining that the display of the performance announcement effect image P47 is not to be started (step S2908: NO) or when the process of step S2909 is executed, the overall CPU 141 includes, for example, an instruction to start the music performance effect in the process of step S2803. Based on whether or not the main liquid crystal display list is set in the display list storage area 1491, it is determined whether or not the display of the music performance effect image P48 related to the music performance effect is started (step S2910). If it is determined that the display of the music performance effect image P48 has been started (step S2910: YES), the audio DSP 143 starts audio output related to the music performance effect image P48 in synchronization with the display of the music performance effect image P48 (step S2910: YES). S2911).
In the determination in step S2910, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer specified in the priority management table. Is done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined not to start displaying the music performance effect image P48 (step S2910: NO), or when the process of step S2911 is executed, the process is performed in the data transmission control process (see FIG. 38) of step S3000. It is advanced.

  Here, the audio priority output processing based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer defined in the priority management table will be described. As an audio output control process executed based on the priority management table, there are audio output control patterns shown below. This process corresponds to priority determination means.

First, when the time for outputting the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, priority is given to these layers. A sound output control pattern 1 that performs output control only for sounds related to effects (or displays) belonging to the highest level (including sounds related to effects (or displays) belonging to the lower priority layers).
This audio output control pattern 1 is adopted when one layer is the seventh layer or the eighth layer, or when one layer is the fourth layer and the other layer is the third layer. And the audio output ratio with other layers is 10: 0. In addition, since the sound in the case of outputting the jackpot definite sound in the variation effect of the third layer belongs to the seventh layer, the priority of the sound output becomes high when outputting the jackpot definite sound.

Next, in the case where the time to output the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, The sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to the layer with the highest priority is output so that it can be heard by the player (in some cases, the game hall staff), and the effect belonging to a layer other than the layer with the highest priority (or Output control pattern 2 for controlling the output of the voice related to (display) more difficult to hear than the highest priority layer.
In this audio output control pattern 2, when one layer is the sixth layer and the other layer is the fourth layer, or when one layer is the fifth layer and the other layer is the fourth layer The audio output ratio between one layer and another layer is 7: 3.

[Light emission control processing by CPU of lamp control board 150]

Although the light emission control process in the CPU of the lamp control board 150 is not shown, the light emission control process in the CPU of the lamp control board 150 is synchronized with the sound output from the speaker 24 by the sound output control process controlled by the overall CPU 141. Therefore, it is necessary to perform light emission control.
Therefore, the light emission control process in the CPU of the lamp control board 150 replaces “audio output” in steps S2903, S2906, S2909, and S2911 with “light emission output” in the same detailed flowchart as the audio output control process in FIG. 72, and step S2906. In step S2907, “sound output is stopped” is replaced with “stop light emission output”, and “stop sound output” in step S2907 is replaced with “stop light emission output”. be able to.

Here, priority output processing of light emission in various light emitting elements based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer defined in the priority management table will be described. This process corresponds to priority determination means.
As the light emission output control process executed based on the priority management table, the light emission output of various light emitting elements related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers. When the light emission output timings of the various light emitting elements are overlapped, only the light emitting elements related to the rendering (or display) of the layer having the highest priority among these layers are controlled to emit light.
However, when the light emitting element related to the effect (or display) of the layer with the lower priority does not overlap with the light emitting element related to the effect (or display) of the layer with the highest priority, the effect ( Alternatively, the light emission output control processing of the light emitting element according to (display) is also executed.

Among the operation control processes in the CPU of the lamp control board 150, the fluctuation effects accompanying the special symbol fluctuation display are based on the game information (various commands) transmitted from the game control board 100 as described above. Since the contents and the start / end timing are set in the effect control board 130, the CPU of the lamp control board 150 determines whether the logo effect object 7 or the CPU based on the change effect start command instructing the start of the change effect of the effect pattern selected by the sub CPU 131. Then, the operation control process of the movable accessory composed of the sub liquid crystal display device 6 and the logo accessory 7 is executed.
Further, in the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect executed in the special effect mode, when performing the operation control process for operating the logo accessory 7, the CPU performs the operation control process in synchronization with the light emission control process, The logo accessory 7 can be operated during the performance announcement performance or the performance performance special performance performed in the special performance mode.

[Operational effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 that cannot be used for other effects because they are normally used for normal effects are used from the game control board 100. The performance performance of the music that is irrelevant to the timing at which the effect control board 130 receives various commands (game information) and the information indicated by these commands is executed. Therefore, an effect with a high degree of freedom can be executed without being greatly restricted by the game control board 100 that controls the game.

  In addition, when a music performance effect is performed, it is possible to execute a normal effect that uses special effect data that was not used before the music performance effect was performed. The function of notifying the change of the effect state of the normal effect that the effect that was not performed will appear will be achieved. For this reason, not only is the degree of freedom high, but an effective performance can be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used for the normal presentation accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, the music performance is performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 without being affected by the variation display of the special symbol. Since the performance is performed, there is an advantage that the interest of the musical performance performance is not impaired by the normal performance.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the island power supply device 500 with a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on the same island in the pachinko hall with the individual power switch provided in each pachinko gaming machine 1 set to “ON”. By turning on the power supply (see FIG. 5), it is possible to simultaneously activate the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. For this reason, as described in this embodiment, the time condition based on the elapsed time from power-on (whether or not 1 hour has passed in this embodiment) is set to be the same for a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. By doing this, it is possible to start a musical performance performance at once on a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, since a music performance effect is performed in which a new song is performed as an unperformed content, a more interesting performance is performed compared to a case where a special effect is performed using known content. Is possible.

[Variation regarding start time of performance announcement]
FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the start time of the performance announcement effect and the variation time of the special symbol. In the above embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (A), the start time of the performance announcement effect is set to 1 minute, and when the variation effect longer than 1 minute is performed, The case where the performance announcement effect is not performed in the case where the variation production until the start time and the music performance production start time has not developed has been described. Instead, the start time of the performance announcement effect may be set to a time longer than the longest time of the special symbol variation time.

  With this configuration, if the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached when the variation effect is being performed, the change effect will always end before the start time of the music performance effect. The time for performing the performance can be ensured.

[Modification of State Control Processing in Step S2200]
By the way, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the first performance performance is performed when the performance performance flag is set to “ON” while the performance performance permission flag is set to “ON”. The configuration may cause the following problems. That is, since the RTC information is used to control the music performance presentation permission flag, there is a possibility that an error occurs between the aircraft regarding the timing at which the music performance presentation permission flag is set to “ON”. On the other hand, for example, when the island power supply device 500 is turned on at 8:00, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), in the 48th series, the music performance is performed before 4 hours have passed since the power is turned on. While the performance permission flag is set to “ON”, there is a possibility that the performance performance permission flag is set to “ON” after 4 hours have passed since the power is turned on in the 49th series. When such a situation occurs, the first performance performance of the new song B is started when 4 hours elapses after the power is turned on in the 48th series, whereas 4 hours after the power is turned on in the 49th series. When the music has passed, the music performance effect of the new song A is started, so that a song shift occurs between the aircrafts.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, instead of the music performance presentation permission flag, the same as the music performance presentation permission flag set to “ON” when the time indicated by the RTC information is exactly 12:00, for example. The first permission flag and the second permission flag that is set to “ON” when the time indicated by the RTC information becomes 12:15, for example, and both of these two flags are set to “ON”. As a condition, execution of the first performance performance may be permitted. When this configuration is applied to the example described above based on FIG. 74A, both the 48th and 49th units have the first permission flag and the second permission flag set to “ ON "is set (see FIG. 74B). For this reason, when 4 hours have passed since the power was turned on, for example, the performance of the new song A started on both units, and when 5 hours had passed since the power was turned on, the first performance of the new song B started on both units. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of bending deviation.

[Modified example of display list creation table]
FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram of the all-mode table. In the above embodiment, when the first song performance performance of the new song is performed, the special selection for switching the display list creation table to be used is also performed in the state where all songs are released in order to newly appear the performance based on the new song in the normal performance. The case of executing was described. On the other hand, as another embodiment, the display list is created using the all mode table in which the selection ratios of the production patterns of all new songs are set equal as shown in FIG. It may be. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the normal production based on each new song appear in a balanced manner.

Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described.
In Embodiment 1 which concerns on the invention mentioned above, a game effect image is mainly displayed on the display screen 114a of the image display part 114. FIG. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which other embodiments described below are applied, the special effect image is mainly displayed on the display screen 114a.
In the description of other embodiments, the same components as those of the embodiment according to the invention are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[Other embodiment 1]
FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a screen configuration during a jackpot game in the special effect mode of the other embodiment 1.
In the embodiment of the invention, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 7, the case where the special effect image is reduced and displayed as necessary and the game effect image is displayed in the entire area is described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, if it contains information that is relatively important to the player, such as a notification that prompts the player to make a right hit at the jackpot opening, it is difficult to convey information to the player if dots are displayed in the lower area A2. It is considered that a game effect image such as a notification that prompts the player to make a right hit at the jackpot opening is reduced and displayed within a range where information is transmitted to the player.
In this case, it is possible for the player to convey information relatively important to the player to the player while sufficiently enjoying the image of the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect which is a special effect.
Therefore, in another embodiment 1, when a big hit occurs in the special effect mode, the game effect image is reduced while the special effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the upper area A1. A case where the special effect image is superimposed and displayed will be described.
In addition, in other Embodiment 1, description regarding the structure and process which are common in the pachinko gaming machine 1 which concerns on embodiment of an invention is abbreviate | omitted, and a different point from embodiment of invention is demonstrated.

FIG. 76A is a screen diagram showing a state in which the opening effect displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is reduced and displayed in the special effect mode. As illustrated in FIG. 76 (A), when the decorative symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, the type of jackpot is notified and prior to the opening of the big winning opening 13. An opening effect including notification that prompts the player to make a right strike is performed. The opening effect shown in FIG. 76A may be executed in place of the opening effect shown in FIG.
In this way, during the normal performance for notifying information of relatively high importance to the player, the music performance performance image P48 is continuously displayed in the entire area, and the game performance image is reduced and superimposed on the game performance image. To do. The same applies to the case where the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed.

FIG. 76 (A) illustrates a state in which the opening effect image, which is a game effect image, is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, but the screen for reducing the opening effect image is displayed. The upper position may be another position. However, if the opening effect image is displayed in the center of the screen or the display size of these images is too small, the opening effect is difficult to see and information is not easily transmitted to the player. For this reason, it is desirable that the display position and display size of these game effect images be appropriate in consideration of the display position and display size from which various messages can be grasped.
76A to 76C, the music performance effect image P48 displays the remaining time of the music performance effect until the music performance effect ends, and the remaining time of the music performance effect is confirmed. By doing so, the player can grasp the remaining time until the musical performance performance is finished.

FIG. 76 (B) is a screen view showing how the challenge chance game effect displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is reduced in the special effect mode, and the challenge chance game effect (R4) shown in FIG. 55 is displayed. Alternatively, it may be executed.
FIG. 76 (C) is a screen view showing a state where the short-time fixed effect displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is reduced and displayed in the special effect mode, and is replaced with the short-time fixed effect (R7) shown in FIG. May be executed.
Note that description of FIGS. 76B and 76C is the same as that of FIG.
76A to 76C are examples, and the present invention can be applied to some or all of the opening, R4 to R8, and ending production scenes in FIG.
For these drawing processes, the above-described drawing process 4 is used.

[Other embodiment 2]
FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing screen configurations of the normal effect mode and the special effect mode of the second embodiment.
In addition, in other Embodiment 2, the description regarding the structure and process which are common in the pachinko gaming machine 1 which concerns on embodiment of an invention is abbreviate | omitted, and a different point from embodiment of invention is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (A), the display screen 114a in the normal effect mode has a variable effect image (including a background image P11, a decorative symbol P12, a reserved ball display P13, a character P14, and an item image P15). (Game effect image) is displayed. Even in the normal performance mode to which the other embodiment 2 is applied, using these element images, a game effect is sequentially performed with a predetermined performance time based on the progress of the game based on the result of the lottery. .

As shown in FIG. 77 (B), on the display screen 114a in the special effect mode, a game effect image composed of element images such as the background P21, the decoration symbol P22, and the reserved ball display P23 is displayed. Furthermore, the special effect image which is the performance notification image P47 or the music performance image P48 is displayed on the display screen 114a in the special effect mode.
In the special effect mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the special effect image is displayed in the special effect area A1 and the game effect image in the game effect area A2, respectively, on the area division screen. And the game effect image are simultaneously displayed on the display screen 114a.
As described above, also in the other embodiment 2, basically, after shifting from the normal effect mode to the special effect mode as in the embodiment according to the invention, the game effect image and the special image are displayed using the divided area display. The effect image is displayed at the same time.

  Here, by the set time of the special effect mode, the symbol variation which is the variation of the decorative symbol P12 displayed on the display screen 114a in the variation effect (normal effect) in the normal effect mode shown in FIG. 77 (A) does not end. There is a case. In such a case, for example, if the screen display is switched to the divided area screen shown in FIG. 77B when the mode is shifted to the special effect mode, the result of the variable effect becomes difficult for the player to understand.

Therefore, in another embodiment 2, the reduced game effect image is superimposed and displayed on the special effect image under certain conditions such that the symbol variation does not end by the set time of the special effect mode.
For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the performance announcement image P47 is entirely displayed on the display screen 114a, and the decorative design P12 continuously displayed from the normal performance mode is reduced and superimposed on the performance announcement image P47. To display. In addition, as shown in FIG. 77C, the music performance image P48 is displayed entirely on the display screen 114a, and the decorative design P12 continuously displayed from the normal performance mode is reduced and superimposed on the music performance image P48. To display.
As described above, in the second embodiment, if the variation effect is not completed by the set time of the special effect mode, the decorative symbol P12 that displays the variation effect is the content displayed in the normal effect mode. The image is reduced as it is and superimposed on the special effect image.

In another embodiment 2, the holding ball display P13 maintains the display size of the holding ball display P13 displayed in the normal effect mode shown in FIG. 77 (A), and FIGS. 77 (C) and 77 (D). As shown, the display is performed as it is in the special effect mode. The holding ball display P13 is not displayed largely on the display screen 114a. Therefore, if the time is reduced in the same way as the decorative pattern P12 due to the setting time of the special effect mode, it is highly likely that the display content of the holding ball is difficult to understand for the player. Therefore, in another embodiment 2, the reservation ball display P13 is configured to continue display in the same size even in the special effect mode without changing the display contents from the normal effect mode.
The screen configuration of FIG. 77 (C) is a display applicable instead of the screen configuration as shown in FIGS. 51 (B-3) and (C-3), and the screen configuration of FIG. 77 (D). Is a display applicable instead of the screen configuration as shown in (B-2) of FIG.

Furthermore, in other Embodiment 2, when it becomes set time of special production mode, the display of the character P14 and the item P15 is prohibited. As for the character P14 and the item P15, if they are simply reduced and displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P12, the contents may be difficult to understand. In addition, the character P14 and the item P15 have lower priority as information for displaying the lottery result than the decorative symbol P12 and the reserved ball display P13. On the other hand, if the character P14 and the item P15 are displayed with the display size in the normal effect mode, the area where the special effect image in the special effect mode is hidden increases.
Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which another embodiment 2 is applied, the display of the character P14 and the item P15 on the display screen 114a is prohibited in the special effect mode.

[Other variations]
In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine that is a pachinko game machine has been described as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other game machines include a rotary machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, A ball ball game machine or the like may be used, and these game machines may be equipped with a payout device for paying out a medium such as a ball or a medal, but not so (for example, a so-called enclosed type). Also good.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the start timing of a music performance production | presentation was controlled based on the elapsed time on the basis of the time of power-on of the pachinko game machine 1, it replaced with this, for example, a customer waiting state is cancelled | released Based on the elapsed time since the game was started (the time the player is playing), the start timing of the performance of the music performance is controlled, or the game history such as the total number of times and the number of times the special game has been played The start timing of the musical performance performance may be controlled based on the above.

  In the above embodiment, the case has been described in which it is determined whether or not to start the music performance effect based on the elapsed time since the power is turned on, but whether or not to start the music performance effect is determined by another method. You may make it do. For example, the set time is stored in the control ROM 144, it is determined whether or not the current time measured by the RTC 134 has reached the set time, and when it is determined that the set time has been reached, the music performance effect is started. Also good. According to this configuration, by setting the same set time for a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1, if there is no deviation in the current time measured by each RTC 134 of each pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines Regardless of whether or not the machines 1 are installed on the same island, it is possible to start the performance of the music performance on the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 at the same time.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used to perform the normal performance, the performance announcement performance, and the music performance performance is described. However, at least one of these effects is performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Or may be executed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the special performance is a music performance performance that performs a new song as an unperformed content has been described, but the special performance is an effect that announces an unperformed content (for example, a character) other than the new song. It may be an effect using known content.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example. However, the present invention can be applied to, for example, a single-type pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine. It can be applied to other gaming machines.

  In addition, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the screen diagrams and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be screens of other display modes.

  As another embodiment, the effect control board 130 may execute part of the processing executed in the image sound control board 140. Further, the effect control board 130 and the image sound control board 140 are integrally configured so that the process executed on the effect control board 130 and the process executed on the image sound control board 140 are executed by one control board. May be.

  Further, in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a so-called probability variation function, the “challenge chance” that is the promotion effect described above may be executed as a promotion effect indicating whether or not the probability variation occurs.

In addition, after the special effect mode is finished, the mode is changed to the normal effect mode. However, the jackpot finalizing effect is performed for a predetermined period after the transition to the normal effect mode (for example, until 20 times of changing effects are executed or 3 minutes). Has a higher probability than usual (for example, 10 times easier to select than usual). Therefore, since the jackpot finalizing effect is easily selected during this predetermined period, if the variable effect executed during this predetermined period is a variable effect that results in a jackpot, the player often sees it as normal. A jackpot finalizing effect that cannot be seen can be seen in this predetermined period. Further, in the predetermined period after the transition to the normal effect mode, a variable effect peculiar to the predetermined period different from the variable effect executed in the normal effect mode other than the predetermined period may be executed.
By doing in this way, gameability can be improved.

  The special effect executing means may execute an effect including unperformed content as the special effect.

1 Pachinko machine (an example of a game machine)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 4 Display 5 Main liquid crystal display device 6 Sub liquid crystal display device 10 Game area 11 1st starting opening 12 2nd starting opening 13 Large winning opening 16 Gate 17 Electric tulip 19 Specific winning opening 24 Speaker 41 First special symbol display 42 Second 2 Special symbol display 100 Game control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
114a Display screen 130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 Sub ROM
133 Sub RAM
134 RTC
140 Image Sound Control Board 141 General CPU
142 VDP
143 Acoustic DSP
144 ROM for control
145 RAM for control
146 ROM for sound
147 SDRAM
148 CGROM
149 VRAM
150 Lamp control board 1491 Display list storage area 1492 Development storage area 1493 Full screen frame buffer 1494 Reduced image frame buffer 1495 Main liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 Sub liquid crystal frame buffer

Claims (1)

A time measuring means for measuring time;
Time determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has been reached based on the time measurement result of the time measurement means;
An error determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined error has occurred;
A normal effect that is executed according to the result of the lottery, and a special effect that is executed when it is determined by the time determination means that a predetermined time has been reached, and
An effect notification means for notifying that it is determined that an error has occurred by the error determination means, and an effect control means for executing,
The production control means includes
When the normal effect is executed when the special effect is not executed, the normal effect is executed according to the first aspect,
When executing the normal effect while executing the special effect, the normal effect is executed in a second mode different from the first mode,
The error notification is executed even when the special effect is being executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.